Home

User`s Manual

1. Control panel BKT button Main command dial Dm Viewfinder At settings other than zero a IHEU icon and bracketing progress indicator appear in the control panel 191 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance RIS Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired O White balance E Ta increment BKT button Sub command dial Contro paner Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired for a definition of mired see page 98 Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber pg 97 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below Control panel display No ofshots White balance increment Bracketing order EVs nF i o r T o 0718 a OTA l a 1A 1B 0 1A 1B 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot p sa up p p i x ie r n arr aD KIA me qr bts wa Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining the E exposure count displays in the control panel and Se Em Ma viewfinder will f
2. EZX ARRAREN ARNNDIN Always turn the camera off before inserting or PWN A removing batteries 2 Open the battery chamber cover Open the battery chamber cover on the bottom of the camera 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 4 Close the battery chamber cover EE Removing the Battery Before removing the battery turn the camera off To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use 23 24 Y The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiv xv and 248 249 of this manual Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatures above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info pg 208 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use Y Incompatible Batteries This camera can not be used with EN EL3 or EN EL3a rechargeable Li ion batter
3. Taa C AEL Nin 27 Ae sueclAl l 30 5 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 180 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display see Custom Setting d8 Shooting info display pg 183 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Shooting mode Cr auto auto flash Off 34 Scene MOES cesssssssssscecsssscscsesecsssecessseces 41 P S A and M MOQeS snessessseesssessseesseesssesss 78 Flexible program indicator 80 Shutter speed Shutter priority aUtO sssessseessseesseesssessse 81 Manual exposure mode s ssesssesseessersserse 83 Exposure compensation valu 00 90 Flash compensation ValUC cccseeceeeees 91 Color temperature se ssesssesssesssesseessesssesseessees 99 Number of shots in bracketing SEQUENCE innara ina 92 191 Aperture f number Aperture priority auto sesssessessessesssese 82 Manual exposure mode ccscseseseeeeseees 83 Bracketing increment AE flash bracketing ssseesssserssseesssseessse 92 White balance bracketing s ss 191 Bracketing programs sseesssessseesseesssesss 264 Release MOJE onsa nS S 64 Continuous shooting speed 64 182 Remote control mode indicator 68 Self timer mode indicator ssss sssseessss00s 66 ISO sensitivity indicator ss
4. esessssesecsesesesscscscscsecscsesesessescscsesecsesesessescseacsessesesessssescacaeeeeseseacssess 91 Exposure and Flash Bracketing ssse sssesseesssessseessseesseesnseosseeosseeossersseeonseosssrosseesseessseesss 92 WAV TIS B A aAA REE E E AE EARR 95 Fine Tuning White Balance csssssssecsssssscsssecsssssscsssecsssesscsssecsssecessecscseseesesessesesseasseces 97 Choosing a Color TEMPerature ccssssssssssecsssecscsssscsssecssssssssesecsssecssseseesssecscssseessseesesees 99 Preset Mantal snuser aa 100 Picture GOVUION S oasa E ENT 108 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls sssessseessseesseesseesssseesseeesseesseessserosseesseesssessseeosseesseees 109 Modifying Existing Picture Controls s sssseesssseessseessseesssseesssseesnsseessseresseeeosseerossseesssee 110 Creating Custom Picture ControlS esesessssessseesseessseessseesseessseosseeosseesseeosseosserossersseesss 113 Sharing Custom Picture Controls csssecsssessccssecsssesscsssessssescsssecsssecscsssesssseesssessesess 115 Managing Custom Picture Controls s sssessseessseesssessseessseesseessseosseeosseesseeesseeseeossseesseee 117 Active D LIgNUN Osaa O E EER 119 Multiple FNC SIAN scerna E EA 121 Ehe GP FGPS UNI nienean an A 124 More on Playback 127 F ll Frame PlAY OACK sesscsecsvaceicsnsvasxecinnssenssunccuensad unsure E OER 128 Photo DIONA U Of weeeerenc tere recent aiia rr nesta aren enter cere sera nt 129 TUM alll PLAY DAC
5. 7 7 job nr Key ZIAN L sas AFA ISo auTO gt 44 4h al 2 Lf NORM mH A iL On 167 168 High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise This option is available in all modes Option Description HIGH High Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 800 and higher While NORM Normal photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will default drop Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High Normal LOW Low and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0 3 and higher The Off amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR Active Folder Create rename or delete folders or choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored This option is available in all modes e Select folder Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored NCD90 Current folder default folder Select folder Other folders in alphabetical order e New Create a new folder and name it as described below e Rename Select a folder from the list and rename it as described below e Delete Delete all empty folders on the memory card EE Naming and Renaming Folders Folder names can be up to five characters long To move the cursor in the name area press the 9 button BEEE iiti Keyboard KLUNOPQR
6. Clean Image Sensor Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to choose options for automatic image sensor cleaning pg 244 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low pass filter that protects the camera image sensor pg 246 Video Mode When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a type C cable available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below Option Description AUTO Auto default The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480p 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576p 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720P 720p progressive 1 280 x 720 progressive format 10801 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected 203 World Time Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set
7. The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Inserting Memory Cards The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital SD memory cards available separately 1 Turn the camera off Power switch aN TE Always turn the camera off before inserting or VANN removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Slide the card slot cover out and open the card slot 3 Insert the memory card Holding the memory card as shown at right slide it in until it clicks into place The memory card access lamp will light for a few seconds Close the memory card slot cover Inserting Memory Cards Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure the cardis in Access lamp the correct orientation If F ar is displayed in the control panel as shown at right format the card as described on the following page ISO AUTO D D D hae 7 The Access Lamp Do not remove the battery or disconnect the power source while the memory card access lamp is lit Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the card 29 EE Formatting Memory Cards Memory cards must be formatted after being used in other devices Format the card as described below V Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permane
8. 4 Cover the viewfinder DK 5 eyepiece cap After framing the photograph remove the viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap as shown This prevents light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure 5 ARNA J Ds MO D S og 5 Take the photograph Aim the transmitter on the ML L3 at the infrared receiver on the camera and press the shutter release button on the ML L3 In delayed remote mode the self timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the shutter is released In quick response remote mode the self timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released If AF A or AF S is selected in autofocus modes pg 54 the camera will return to stand by mode without releasing the shutter if unable to focus The camera will release the shutter without focusing in manual focus mode if AF Cis selected in autofocus mode or if the camera has already been focused using the camera shutter release button see step 3 Remote control mode can be cancelled by selecting another release mode Single frame or continuous mode will be restored if the camera is turned off or no operations are about one minute Using the Built in Flash If the flash is required the camera will only respond to the shutter release button on the ML L3 once the flash has charged In 4 amp and Ig modes the flash will begin charging when delayed remote or quick response remote mode i
9. Delete Load save Custom Picture Controls The edit display for custom Picture Controls contains the same options Original Picture as the original Nikon Picture Control on which it is based The original Control icon control is shown by an icon in the top right corner of the display TINE Sharpening Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue Grid GKHOK Reset Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNxX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software EE Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select Load save Manage Picture Control In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Save edit Load save and press P ec Load save 2 Select Copy to camera Manage Picture Control Cy Load save Highlight Copy to camera and press gt Delete from card Copy to card 3 Select a Picture Control Manage Picture Control s Copy to camera r gt 101 STANDARD 02 Highlight a custom Picture Control and either 102 NEUTRAL 02 r g 104 MONOCHROME 02 press to view current Picture Control settings or press 6
10. Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of On exposures actually recorded gain for each default exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures Gain is not adjusted when recording Off multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark 6 Select Done Multiple exposure O Highlight Done and press 6 A icon will be displayed in the control panel To exit without Number of shots taking a multiple exposure select Multiple icone exposure gt Reset in the shooting menu Multiple exposure O 7 Framea photograph focus and shoot In St and GH release modes pg 64 the camera records all exposures in a single burst In single frame release mode one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 123 122 The icon will blink until shooting ends When shooting ends multiple exposure mode will end and the icon will no longer be displayed al Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures BE Interrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting menu while a Multiple exposure O multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before t
11. TTL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Auto aperture available only with SB 900 and SB 800 flash units Choose flash AA compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV M_ Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Group Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same Channel annal Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash Flash enrl for built in flash Commander mode Choose the flash control mode and output level for the cuitin fish M EE built in flash Note that output level can not be adjustedin EKK A Group B TIL E O mode Channel CH Move G Set ONOK 188 2 Adjust settings for group A Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A 3 Adjust settings for group B Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B 4 Select the channel 5 Press 6 Compose the shot Built in flash Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp Built in flash TTL Group A TTL E 0 7E Group B Channel CH Move G Set OKOK Flash cntrl for built in
12. e6 Bracketing Order At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN exposure and flash bracketing are performed in the order described on pages 92 and 264 white balance bracketing in the order no modification A B pg 191 If Under gt MTR gt over is selected exposure and flash bracketing will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value white balance bracketing in the order A no modification B This option is available in P S A and M modes only 195 196 f Controls f1 amp Switch Choose the function performed by rotating the power switch to the 8 position This option is available in all shooting modes Option Description LCD backlight 8 default Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s 2 Both Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting information is displayed in monitor f2 OK Button Shooting Mode This option available in all shooting modes determines what operations can be performed by pressing the button in shooting mode Option Description Select center focus point Pressing the amp button in shooting mode selects the center focus default point Highlight active focus Pressing the button in shooting mode highlights the active point focus point Pressing the button has no effect when the camera is in Not used shooting mode f3 Assign FUNC Button Choose the role played by the Fn button This option is available in all shoo
13. eesessseeeescseeees 65 White balance recording indicator 101 Exposure compensation Value s000 90 Flash compensation Value ceseceeeeees 91 Capture mode indicator sse sseessesssessse 148 ISO SONSITIVITY ccccscscsserereseseseeseseees 74 181 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures se ssessessesssessessessee 35 Flash ready indicator cscsssscsssessssecscseees 42 Autoexposure AE lock indicator 88 Electronic analog exposure display 84 Exposure COMPENSATION cecesececscseeeeeeees 90 Flash compensation indicator 0000 91 Exposure compensation indicator 90 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 166 ISO sensitivity compensation indicator 74 The Shooting Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the Ei button is pressed Press the i button again to change selected settings pg 12 To clear shooting information from the monitor press the Hi button a third time or press the shutter release button halfway At default settings the monitor will turn off automatically if no Ei button operations are performed for about 10 seconds i 3 rr A AK G m0 Cetin ISO AUTO les NS TIKA RIRPT 17 16 15 14 13 12 2122 232425 26 37 PERRET
14. ssse ssssesssseesssseesssse 92 White balance bracketing sce06 191 ADL Dracketing c ccsssscssssecsssssecesseeeees 193 Active D Lighting bracketing amount 193 Image comment INdICATOM ssceceeeeees 205 AUTOFOCUS mode sessesssseeeseseeesssessssecsssseessssee 54 ISO sensitivity essessesesessesssessesseessesse 74 181 Number of exposures remaining 35 GPS CONNECTION INICATOTS cesses 124 Auto area AF iINdicatol c cccsssesssseeesees 173 3D tracking indicator se sssessseesssessseesssees 173 FOCUS POME fscasssassreceoscsevdenurtoncenctaessasecrenccansbsenss 54 AF area mode indicator sseesssesseesssees 173 IMAGE quality narosna 62 image SZE aoe rete ee eer ae ere 63 Clock not set indicator ceceee 27 255 Camera battery indicator 34 MB D80 battery type display 0 184 MB D80 battery indicator 184 11 EE Changing Settings in the Shooting Information Display Quick Settings Display To change settings for the items listed below press the Hf button in the shooting information display Highlight items E using the multi selector and press to jump to the menu for the highlighted item M button High ISO NR 1 Long exposure noise reduction 167 5 Fn button assignMent ss sseessseesssersseers 197 2 High ISO noise reduction ses ssseessses 168 6 AE L AF L button assignment
15. See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 179 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f4 Assign AE L AF L button pg 200 89 90 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker It is most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering pg 87 Exposure compensation is available in modes P S and A in mode M only the exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change Press the 4 button and rotate the main H button command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 7 0 EV 0 3 EV 2 EV 4 button pressed At values other than 0 a 4 icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the 4 button The current value for exposure compensation will be displayed when the i button is pressed 1 EV No exposure compensation Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Expos
16. V AF Assist Illumination AF assist illumination is not available with the following lenses e AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED e AF VR 80 400 mm f 4 5 5 6D ED e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S VR 200 400 mm f 4G ED e AF 80 200mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 1 m 3 ft 3 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S DX 12 24mm f 4G ED e AF 24 85mm f 2 8 4D e AF S DX NIKKOR 16 85 mm f 3 5 5 6GEDVR e AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED e AF S 17 35 mm f 2 8D ED e AF 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6D e AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED e AF 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D ED e AF 28 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED e AF S DX 18 70mm f 3 5 4 5G ED e AF Micro 70 180mm f 4 5 5 6D ED e AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105mm f 3 5 5 6GEDVR e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED e AF S DX VR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G e AF Micro 200mm f 4D ED e AF 20 35 mm f 2 8D e AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 24 85 mm f 3 5 4 5G ED 231 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18 300 mm Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below 35mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in 50mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 200 mm 3 0 m 9 ft 10 in 250 mm 3
17. e Check that contacts are clean If card is damaged e Reduce quality or size 62 63 e Delete photographs 162 e Insert new memory card 29 blinks ao a No memory card This memory card Error accessing cannot be used memory card il Nik Cardmay be damaged contact retailer or Nikon representative Insert another card i Unable to create new Delete files or insert new 29 folder memory card 162 This card is not Memory card has not Far Format memory card or insert formatted been formatted for use 29 30 blinks new memory card Format the card in camera Select folder containing images from Playback folder 29 menu or insert different 162 memory card No images can be played back until another folder has been selected or Hideimage 162 used to allow at least one image to be displayed File has been created or modified using a computer or different make of camera or file is corrupt No images on memory card or in folder s selected for playback Folder contains no images All photos in current All images are hidden folder are hidden File can not be played back on camera File does not contain w image data 256 Indicator Control panel Monitor viewfinder Problem Page i 7 oe me memory cares a act eugene Memory card is locked Slide card write protect NCE OCA towne a write protected switch to write position 3 position blin
18. eseseeeeeees 61 7 Time of recording 27 2 Retouch indicator 209 5 Image quality e 62 8 Date of recording 27 3 Frame number 6 IMAGE SIZE nsssssssessseesssessse 63 9 Folder NaMe 162 total number of images 129 BE RGB Histogram 5 6 7 8 9 1 Protect status 139 5 Histogram RGB channel 6 Histogram red channel 2 Retouch indicator 209 In all histograms 7 Histogram green 3 White balance ween 95 horizontal axis gives channel White balance fine pixel brightness vertical 8 Histogram blue channel el LUNING eemeeerne Serer crm 97 axis number of pixels 9 Frame number 4 Camera name total number of images 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode pg 163 Playback Zoom To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed press amp for more information on playback zoom see page 138 The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications Some sample histograms are shown below If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left Ifthe image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the right Papier
19. kuti or indicators appear in the shutter speed displays 81 Mode A Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture to control depth of field see below while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Rotate the mode dial to A Tana james 2 Choose an aperture 82 Press the shutter release button halfway to activate the exposure meters and rotate the sub command dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum Sub command and maximum for the lens dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Depth of Field Depth of field is the distance to which objects behind and in front of the focus point appear to be in focus Large apertures low f numbers reduce depth of field blurring objects behind and in front of the main subject Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field bringing out details in the background and foreground note that depth of field is also influenced by other factors such as focal length and focus distance Short field depths are generally used in portraits to blur background details long field depths in landscape photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus To preview depth of field press and hold the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the current aperture value all
20. 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Landscape Portrait storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls Media SD Secure Digital memory cards SDHC compliant File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 96 horizontal and 96 vertical Magnification Approx 0 94 x 50mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 19 5 mm 1 0 m Diopter adjustment 2 1 m Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with focus frame framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera other modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled 267 Lens Compatible lenses Shutter Type Speed Flash sync speed Release Release mode Frame advance rate Self timer Exposure Metering Metering method Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F Exposure meter coupling Mode Exposure compensation Exposure bracketing Fla
21. 26 228 attaching 25 cap 25 cap rear 25 compatible 228 CPU 26 229 focus mode switch 25 focus ring 25 mounting index 25 non CPU 230 removing 26 type D 228 type G 228 VR switch 25 Lens mount 3 60 Live view 43 50 176 Live view autofocus 176 Face priority 176 Normal area 176 Wide area 176 Lock mirror up for cleaning 246 Long exp NR 167 Long time exposure with remote control 85 M M Image size 63 Magenta 97 216 Manage Picture Control 113 Manual 45 59 83 Manual focus 45 59 Matrix 87 MB D80 184 208 239 MB D80 battery type 184 Memory buffer 38 64 Memory card 29 202 242 capacity of 262 formatting 30 202 Metering center weighted 87 matrix 87 spot 87 Mired 98 Mirror 4 246 lock up for cleaning 246 Modeling flash 191 Monitor 5 43 128 202 cover 17 Monitor off delay 180 Monochrome 214 Black and white 214 Cyanotype 214 Sepia 214 Mounting index 25 Movie settings 170 Quality 170 Sound 170 Movies 50 Multiple exposure 121 MY MENU 224 Add items 225 Rank items 226 277 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold Remove items 225 N NEF 62 NEF RAW 62 148 220 NEF RAW processing 220 Nikon Transfer 148 149 No memory card 201 0 OK button shooting mode 196 Optional flash 185 Overview data 134 P Photo info 129 163 PictBridge 150 274 Pictmotion 141 Picture angle 228 Picture Controls 108
22. C Timers AE lock 1 Beep d Shooting display Bracketing flash f Controls d2 Viewfinder grid display d31SO display and adjustment OFF _ d Shooting display ON d2 Viewfinder grid display OFF d31SO display and adjustment OFF a4 Viewfinder warning display ON d5 Screen tips ON d6 CL mode shooting speed Fy 3 d7 File number sequence OFF d8 Shooting info display AUTO Reset custom settings Bracketing flash 1 60 Flash cntrl for built in flash TTL Modeling flash Auto bracketing set Auto FP Bracketing order 1 switch 8 f2 OK button shooting mode RESET _ R Reset custom a settings pg 172 Bracketing order N f2 OK button shooting mode RESET 3 Assign FUNC button 4 Assign AE L AF L button 2E 5 Customize command dials 6 No memory card LOCK EJ 7 Reverse indicators 0 _ 171 Custom Setting Page R Reset custom settings 172 a Autofocus al AF area mode 172 a2 Center focus point a3 Built in AF assist illuminator 174 a4 AF point illumination 175 a5 Focus point wrap around 175 a6 AE L AF L for MB D80 176 a7 Live view autofocus b Metering exposure b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl b2 Easy exposure compensation 177 b3 Center weighted area b4 Fine tune optimal exposure 178 c Timers AE lock cl Shutter release button AE L 179 c2 Auto meter off delay c3 Self timer c4 Monitor off delay 180 c5 Remote on duration d Shooting display d
23. Nikon Transfer is used to copy photographs from the camera to the computer where they can be viewed using ViewNX Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred while ViewNX can be used to sort photographs convert images to different file formats and perform simple editing on NEF RAW photographs Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Y During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately pg 240 can be used to control the camera from a computer When Camera Control Pro 2 is running P will be displayed in the control panel 148 Connecting the Camera Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off Power switch ZADU C 2 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 3 Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle V USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 4 Turn the camera on 5 Transfer photographs Nikon Transfer will start automatically click the Start Tr
24. QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel Image size can also be adjusted from the shooting menu pg 165 ER Q QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When viewed on a computer NEF images are 4 288 x 2 848 pixels in size 63 64 Release Mode Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one at atime ina continuous sequence with a timed shutter release delay or with a remote control Mode Description Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release button is S Single frame pressed Access lamp will light while photo is recorded next shot can be taken immediately if enough space remains in memory buffer Camera records 1 4 frames per second while shutter release button is held down pg 65 Frame rate can be chosen with Custom Setting d6 CL mode shooting speed pg 182 ory Continuous Camera records up to 4 5 frames per second while shutter release high speed button is held down pg 65 Use for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake pg 66 Delayed remote Optional ML L3 remote control required Use for self portraits pg 68 Optional ML L3 remote control required Use to reduce blurring caused by remote camera shake pg 68 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery manual focus
25. Red eye correction 212 Can crop photographs on the camera Trim 213 Can create a monochrome copy of a photograph Monochrome 214 Can create a copy with different colors Filter effects 215 How do adjust existing colors Color balance 216 Can make a small copy of a photograph Small picture 216 Can overlay two photos to make a single image Image overlay 218 Can use the camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs P NEF RAW processing 220 Is there a quick way to retouch photographs Quick retouch 221 Can straighten photographs Straighten 221 How do reduce distortion Distortion control 222 Can create the effect of a fisheye lens Fisheye 222 Can compare retouched copies with the originals Side by side comparison 223 Vii Table of Contents OB WAS nea S E A eaeeceterreeena iv FOr VO aE Y E E E Xiv NOT ska test cose cesta caeectecse E AI cae ce open cnc a desececaeb eo deve E xvi Introduction 1 VG AEN ce ccc case feces cae ce T AE S A O ANN O OE 2 G tting TO KNOW the CaMera csscsssssssssssssssscscscsssssscsessssssssesescsescsesssseseseseseseessseseaeseseseesees 3 The Camera BOOY ia gecesi ts saeseeceunetersavavases ones tv ene eas ceausapentaseacatinasy terete testereesea taste 3 The Mode IDA cee sercecicasesectsevetaneterodpeconecoecarsesenvsorsspnessescaasaasiemeesoeeananen aan ager senna 6 The COME ON ANN accatccirescccncracesaaesnrseadieos R A A ANT 7 TENI A a E E A E norte mica
26. This feature is used to lock flash output preventing the flash level from changing between shots or while recomposing photographs Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity or aperture 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button T EUER A AF area mode Both the Fn and the AE L AF L button can be used for FV O on CENAN lock To use the Fn button as described below select FV EA lock for Custom Setting f3 Assign FUNC button To use _ the AE L AF L button choose FV lock for Custom Setting f4 CESELtUuci Assign AE L AF L button pg 200 2 Raise the flash AUTO 2 In a amp and I modes the flash will pop up automatically as required when the shutter release button is pressed halfway In P S A and M modes press the button to raise the flash 3 Focus Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter release button halfway to focus 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Flash output will be locked at this level and a FV lock icon EZ will appear in the viewfinder Fn button 5 Recompose the photograph 198 6 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without rel
27. choose a value from 1 9 taken each time the shutter release button is pressed in self timer mode at values other than 1 pictures will be taken at the rate selected for HiL mode pg 182 34s Dis D 8s Diis 030s 21m 5m Diim D3Im X 2s 5s S10s 2ls 10 s default Option 4s 6 s default 8s 16s 30s 1 min 5 min 10 min 30 min Self timer delay 25s 5s 20s 179 180 c4 Monitor off Delay This option available in all shooting modes controls how long Option the monitor remains on when no operations are performed 4s 4s during playback image review or when menus or shooting 1s 10s information is displayed Choose from 4 s the default for image 2s 20s review 10 s the default for playback and shooting information 1m 1min 20 s the default for menus 1 minute 5 minutes or 10 minutes 5m 5min Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life m 10min Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter c5 Remote on Duration Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the Option remote before cancelling delayed or quick response remote im 1 min default modes pg 68 Choose shorter times for longer battery life amp 5m 5min The default setting is one minute im 10 min O Gn 15 min This option is available in all sho
28. printed press 8 Description Menu of page sizes will be displayed pg 152 options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of border options will be displayed pg 152 options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or W to choose print style from Printer default print at current printer settings Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of time stamp options will be displayed pg 152 options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or W to choose Printer default print at current printer settings Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu OK Cancel Selecting Photographs for Printing NEF RAW photographs pg 62 can not be selected for printing JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu See Also See page 250 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 155 HE Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures pg 153 Note that if the memory card co
29. 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 960 x 640 640 x 424 4 3 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 x 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 960 x 720 640 x 480 5 4 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x 1 440 1 200 x 960 896 x 720 608 x 480 213 Monochrome Copy photographs in Black and white Sepia or Cyanotype Monochrome blue and white monochrome Black and white gt A Sepia Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of Increase the selected image press A to increase color saturation saturation W to decrease Press to create a AN monochrome copy lt Gx gt Decrease ar Save saturation 214 Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less Skylight blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the copy pe a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Red intensifier Green Intensify reds Red intensifier greens Green intensifier ihteisitier 2 blues Blue intensifier Press the multi selector up to Blue increase the effect down to decrease ance A intensifier Darker lighter ORSave Add starburst effects to light sources e Number of points Choose from four six or eight e Filter amount Choose th
30. 17 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m71 e Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that require added precision Eyepiece adapter required available separately e Eyepiece Adapter DK 22 The DK 22 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier e Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 6 The DR 6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in portrait orientation Za Viewfinder eyepiece accessories 239 240 Filters Optional flash units pg 233 Software Body cap Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw in slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding The D90 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens To prevent moir use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1 x Y44 Y48 Y52 O56 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 Nikon Speedlights SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and
31. 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft 35 mm zoom head position its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 The following features are available with the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Flash mode feature i TTL i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 2 Mopar ae e een ae tie ee ee a on iy man Cs e ee Win gPT Repentngfash SSW Auto FP High Speed Sync We ee Viod AF assist for multi area AF 2 fw vw w vw Flash Color Information Communication A A A a ee Pe aE kederan v www Power zoom function cee ee e 1 Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 CPU lens required 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 4 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 5 Selected with flash unit 6 Auto
32. 41 Preserve details in Night portrait pg 42 Shoot portraits landscape shots against a dimly lit backdrop W Close up pg 42 Take vivid close ups of flowers insects and other small objects The Control Panel 1 14 13 2 CAZ R vd od a ik rm GL a FAA 12 3 g 1 pt 10 4 LMS GPS K 9 5 vf 8 TMTE lt gt A O 428 9 PRE J a 1 Shutter speed 8 ISO sensitivity compensation indicator Shutter priority AUTO ecsseccsececseseees 81 ISO SONSITIVITY ceccsecsssescsesecssseessseceenees 74 Manual exposure MOE cscssesesseseesesees 83 ISO display and adjustment 0 181 Exposure compensation valu 00 90 9 K appears when memory remains for Flash compensation VAIUEC esses 91 over 1000 exposures seccssssssessseesseeeseesees 35 White balance fine tuning 97 10 Beep indicator vececccccscccscsssssssssssesssssseee 180 White balance color temperature 22 11 GPS connection indicators 124 White balance preset numbet 100 12 Release Mode 64 Number of shots in bracketing 13 Aperture f number sequence Uie 92 Aperture priority AUTO v s 82 2 Battery indicator sseeseseesesessseesssessseesssessss 34 Manual exposure MOde sssssssseuseensee 83 E Hash ModE sssi 71 Bracketing increment 4 Image E F TENN O AAE T E 63 AE flash bracketing TEE EEEE OE 92 5 Image quality ou ssesessesecessesessssecesssseceesees
33. 50DxX is fully charged blinks for 3 s after flash is fired at full output in i TTL or auto aperture modes Accessory shoe Standard ISO 518 hot shoe contact with safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in flash SB 900 System CLS SB 800 or SU 800 as commander and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units White balance White balance Auto TTL white balance with main image sensor and 420 segment RGB sensor 12 manual modes with fine tuning color temperature setting preset white balance white balance bracketing Live view AF modes Face priority wide area normal area Autofocus Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame camera selects focus point automatically when face priority AF is selected 270 Movie Image size pixels File format Compression Monitor Monitor Playback Playback Interface USB Video output HDMI output Accessory terminal Supported languages Supported languages e 1 280 x 720 24 fps e 320 x 216 24 fps AVI Motion JPEG e 640 x 424 24 fps 3 in approx 920k dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle approx 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Full frame and thumbnail 4 9 or 72 imag
34. 62 White balance bracketing u s 191 6 White balance fine tuning indicator 97 Bracketing programS sesessseesssersseesssesss 264 7 White balance ssesesesssesseesssoessoessesseessersseesse 95 14 ColortemperatUure ssessseesseessesssesseessesssess 99 Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if there is room for 1 260 exposures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K 15 16 17 18 THT ni 15 Flash compensation indicator 0 91 16 Clock not set indicator Clock patte Y renamen nenin 27 cata e lt Ae E eee cence 255 17 Flexible program indicator ss sssserssse s 80 M Metering eseesseeseesecssersesscseeressssesecsarosseseroarsaes 87 I FOCUS points seeseesseseesersessoseeseesrossoseoreorosreseoses 56 AF area mode cccsssssssecsssssscessecsssssessssececees 173 20 Autofocus mode sssssseesssssesesssseessssseressseeses 54 21 Black and white indicator 181 22 Number of exposures remaining 35 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fill esessesssesseeseseeees 65 Preset white balance recording WV OICAL OW ia cena dies 101 Capture mode indicator sse sseesse0ss01s00 148 ISO sensitivity ISO sensitivity ssessesssessesssssse
35. 64 The monitor will turn off When shooting is complete the photograph will be displayed in the monitor for 4 s or until the shutter release button is pressed halfway The camera will then return to live view mode 7 Exit live view mode Press the iy button to exit live view mode Y Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned Bright spots may also appear When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry The effects of aperture on depth of field can not be previewed in live view mode but are visible in the final photograph Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicated a malfunction To prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically b
36. 9 The Shooting Information Display esesesssseesssseesssseessseeesseesssseeossseesssseessserossseesssseessseees 10 Ihe Command Dials ss issssssscsossisssessssssresssssresnonssnsonsasinasorsausesnuaorinoecosuuorasii verouder vannas oninssientsss 13 Attaching the AN DC1 Camera Strap ssseesssessssessseesseessseessseesseesseessseeosseesseessseossseessees 17 The BM 10 Monitor COVEN i vcr ctccasavapcucetetranecenle kassera nessen ioie anaoa e enaps 17 The DK 21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup ess ssssseesssesssseessssecsssseesssseesseressseeosseeossseosssersssseess 17 Camera NEE e E NE ere ences eee Sree ere ee 18 Jana camera MENUS eer rere ee ee mnt eE Ee EE EEE ERE 19 a E a AE AA T AE E AA A A E E EE N 21 PRSI EDS aroen i T A A A 22 Charge the Battery ssisonenermriorsinisriieni n OnE RA 22 AEA AEE E 9 r EE EAE E I E E E A ET 23 A EEE a E ET EEA ET EE A E A E mene 25 BaSe a E T er re ree one ee 27 Inserting Memory Cards cssssssssssessssesssssscsssecsssesscsesecsssscsssssecsssesscsssecassecssseseeassessesesscess 29 ACjUSt Viewfinder FOCUS cssessssssssssssecsssecsessssecsssecsssscsecsssecsesscsucsssucsssncsecassucsesasscassncseeees 32 Basic Photography and Playback 33 Point and Shoot Photography and MOdeS cssssssesssessesssessssssesssessessseessee 34 Step T Tarn th Cimera Ofisensseosteriiio niii a 34 Step 2 Choose Shooting and Focus Modes csessssssscsssecssecscsesecsssecscsesecsssecsessseesee
37. A and M modes offer control over a variety of advanced settings including shutter speed and aperture metering flash compensation and white balance Shutter SDEEG ANG APEl UNG sicccccssissacccsevccssustsesecsssccesevesiedea coescosdsNsssusssteveiseatosudcotsteess 78 Mode P Progranimed AUTO 2e a AAA A A A E A A 80 Modes 1ShutterPronty AUTON era E a a AE 81 Mode A Aperture Priority AUTO eren aa e e REE A A E 82 Mode MIManua N eaa ee a R AA E AAEE A E AE 83 Long Time Exposures M Mode ONIY ereere earar 85 EX PDOSUNO cccocsavecsceccscnces cececenss T E A E E E E E T E 87 Meter AA a E A E AA E T A AA A es 87 Autoexposure Lock P S and A Modes Only sssesssessseesseesseessesssesssessseesseesseesseesseesseesss 88 EXPOS WE OMDOEN A ONA a A A E E E ACA L 90 Fla MEOMPENSA ONE A E nascar mata ian E Tee 91 Expos re and Flashi Bracketing eeraa a a A A EA 92 Wite Balin CE aoaaa EENET AAT AAS AE Ta A SSCA OTIENO E EASA 95 Fine LUMingAVinite Balance o a core a N A e eeotes 97 Choosing aC olorlemperattre nra aana nts a a A e eo ess me sestiees 99 Preset Manu alha e a n a n a a E A E A O 100 Picture CONOIS saae Er a goa cee TESA ESAT SAETTA AA eae 108 SeElecCtiNANIKOMPI TULE CONTOS aae a A A A E E sis etree 109 Modifying Existing Picture E Ontol a a a e a EEE 110 Creatina CUStOMm PICTUS CONTOS a a ee a E E E R a 113 Sharing Custonn PICTUS CONOIS a E a E AAE 115 Managing Custom Picture CONtrolS seeren e ae a e a 117 RBH e laniek EAA
38. E cos Selected Select individual pictures for the show Select a date All pictures taken on the selected date will appear in the show Create a show using all the pictures in the current playback folder Select date ALL All Only pictures in the folder currently selected in the Playback folders pg 162 menu can be included in the show Hidden pictures and pictures that can not be viewed on the camera will not be displayed Movies Pictmotion shows can include movies but only the first few seconds of each movie will be displayed EE Choosing Background Music To choose background music for the Pictmotion show select PEEN Background music in the Pictmotion menu Choose from SENEE High speed Emotional Natural Up tempo and Relaxed sets nth Pause HE Transitions To choose the transitions between pictures in the Pictmotion show select Effects in the Pictmotion menu Choose from Zoom bounce Zoom in out Blend Wipe and Zoom out fade 141 BE Viewing the Pictmotion Show To view the show highlight Start in the Pictmotion menu and PEE press The following operations can be performed while the Bierre r Jeja oos Background music il show is in progress ae ao To o Use Description re Pause slide show Pause show see below Raise volume Lower volume Press 8 and 95 to raise and lower volume Exit to playback See page 159 for more information menu Exit to playback a End show and return
39. E E E T E E S 63 Release Mode moo eean ELETE ENEE S EANET Aaaa EA Eoee TALEE aai 64 CONUNUOUS MOJCA N a A A A E A eed nT eles eet 65 Sel TME rMOd ENN a E A A Ree ee 66 Using an Optional Remote Control B eserinin iieii 68 Using the BUNGIE ASIN cccosesrscsactcccceSvcsecstuesceuncsiuesssesi0asets iveesss SEANA AA EEEE ELA ARREARS ara 70 RASE MO dE A E AA A E esis A E e AA A ORE ER 71 EDETI S A E S T E E T A E E E E 74 PWO BUON RESET fie sccccs scossccccvsss cs sseccresesissccecereevessortccavesssuesecasevneacecss lt s PASA EAS ESIA coeverss 75 53 Focus Focus can be adjusted automatically see Autofocus below or manually pg 59 The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus pg 59 or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing pg 57 Autofocus When the focus mode selector is set to AF the camera Focus mode selector focuses automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway In single point AF a beep will sound when the camera focuses No beep will sound when AF A is selected in amp sports mode or when continuous servo autofocus is used note that continuous servo autofocus may be selected automatically when shooting moving subjects in AF A autofocus mode With lenses that offers A M selection select Awhen using autofocus With lenses that support M A autofocus with manual priority select M A If the lens does not support autofocus or the cam
40. ED II e AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED II e AF I 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED e AF S 300mm f 4D ED 2 e AF I 600mm f 4D ED e AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR e AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 e AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E II TC 20E Il 229 230 Non CPU Lenses Non CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses without a built in CPU The following is a list of compatible non CPU lenses and accessories Camera setting Focus _ Mode Metering M with electronic T m Z ai E3 o Lens accessory rangefinder z iS P S A Ea Al Al modified Nikkor or Nikon Series Elenses v W Medical Nikkor 120mm f 4 5 ie Reflex Nikkor Sl Aa o ro PENIKON S E Al type Teleconverter WwW a PB 6 Bellows Focusing Attachment Yo Wj v Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 Je f e B PN 11 1 Some lenses can not be used see below 2 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster 3 Electronic analog exposure display can not be used 4 Shutter speeds slower than 1 60 s not available 5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting 6 With maximum effective ap
41. Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera will vary Active D Lighting with each shot The first shot will be taken with Active D Lighting off the following shot at the value currently selected for Active D Lighting in the shooting menu pg 165 While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel The i segment will disappear from the indicator when the unmodified shot is taken the B indicator when the shot with Active D Lighting is taken BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BkT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator is no longer displayed in the control panel V Active D Lighting Matrix metering amp s pg 87 is recommended The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 111 can not be adjusted while active D Lighting is in effect In exposure mode M an Active D Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal 194 e5 Auto FP Selecting On for this option available in only P S A and M modes enables Auto FP High Speed Sync with optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Auto FP allows the flash to be used at shutter speeds 1 200 s 4o00 s Choose to enable fill flash when taking portraits under bright light or when taking photographs at large apertures Auto FP High Speed Sync is not available when using the built in flash The default setting is Off
42. Full range of shutter speeds not available e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image quality option selected for image quality e Multiple exposure mode is in effect Effects of Picture Control A auto is selected for sharpening contrast or saturation differ from image to For consistent results over a series of photographs choose image a setting other than A auto Metering can not be etering Autoexposure lock is in effect 88 changed E r mpensation XPOSUrE COMPENSAHON Ghagee exposure mode P S or A 20 can not be used Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in Lower built in flash 73 continuous shooting mode Reddish areas appearin Reddish areas and uneven textures may appear in long photos time exposures Turn long exposure noise reduction on 167 Textures are uneven when shooting at shutter speeds of tsb kr White balance bracketing unavailable Playback Problem Flashing areas appear in images Shooting data appear on images A graph appears during playback NEF RAW image is not played back Some photos are not displayed during playback Tall portrait orientation photos are displayed in wide landscape orientation Can not delete photo Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback Can not change print order Can not select photo for printing Photo is not displayed on TV Photo is not displayed on high definition
43. OW RA W Built in FlASA wes esesessesestsseeesessssseeseseesseeens 70 4 flash mode button sessessessessssessesressseees 70 flash compensation button 91 Microphone ssssssesssesssosssesseesseessesssesseessees 50 170 Infrared receivef eesssesssesssesseesseesscesscesseessessees 69 BKT bracketing button sssessssesssessssesssees 92 Connector COVE 0 146 147 149 151 Lens release button ou esesssesseseseseeeseeees 26 FOCUS MOE SEIECTOS eesessssseseeeeeeees 54 59 The Camera Body Continued 14 E MITOY sasseessesesssseseererossesecoacsscosarsacoseresseresee 43 246 10 DC IN connector for optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter ssesesesssesseesseesseesserssersse 239 11 USB connector Connecting to a computer eee 149 Connecting to a printef sesssssessessees 151 12 HDMI mini pin connector s esessessessessesses 147 13 Video Connector ou ccsssssecsssesssseessseeseeseeesees 146 14 Accessory terminal sssesesessssessseesseesssessss 241 WwW N gt nN GH Wi fo The Camera Body Continued 3 4 TOS 2 WI on ISO g QUAL B A D 2 E O N OQO A Viewfinder eyepiece sseesssseesssserssseesssseesssee 32 9 amp playback Zoom in bUttON eee 138 DK 21 viewfinder eyepiece CUP 17 QUAL image quality size button t delete button Image quality ssstscs
44. Playback 48 128 calendar 136 folder 162 full frame 128 information 129 163 menu 160 Pictmotion 141 slide show 143 thumbnail 135 zoom 138 Playback folder 162 Preset Manual 100 Print DPOF 153 Border 155 Page size 155 Start printing 155 Time stamp 155 Print select 153 Border 155 Page size 155 Start printing 155 Time stamp 155 Print set DPOF 150 Printing 150 Programmed auto 80 Protecting photographs 139 delayed remote 68 Quick response remote 68 self timer 66 single frame 64 Remote Control 64 68 241 Remote cord 85 241 Remote on duration 180 Reset 75 172 260 Reset custom settings 172 Reverse indicators 201 RGB 130 167 RGB Histogram 130 Rotate tall 163 S S Image size 63 Screen tips 182 Self timer 179 Sensitivity 74 166 Set Picture Control 109 Landscape 109 Monochrome 109 Filter effects 111 112 Toning 111 112 Neutral 109 Portrait 109 Standard 109 Vivid 109 Setup menu 202 Shooting data 131 132 Shooting info display 10 183 Shooting menu 165 Shutter priority auto 81 Shutter release button 38 39 57 88 179 half press 38 88 Shutter release button AE L 179 Side by side comparison 223 Single point 56 173 Size 63 Slide show 143 Frame interval 143 Slow sync 71 Small picture 216 cable 149 151 UTC 27 124 133 V Vibration Reduction 26 Video 146 203 cable 146 mode 203 Video mode 203 Viewfinder 9 32 66 267 ey
45. Press when settings are complete Hue Grid ONOK Reset 5 Select a destination Manage Picture Control wy Save as Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt E303 Unused FC 4 Unused ECS Unused ECS Unused FC 7 Unused 113 114 6 Name the Picture Control 1 amp 4 i i i lt Keyboard The text entry dialog shown at right will be n a ee displayed By default new Picture Controls NOPQRSTUVWXYZ are named by adding a two digit number Wivio 02 sd Name area assigned automatically to the name of the CE Ecce existing Picture Control This name can be edited to create a new name as described below To move the cursor in the name area press the 9 button and press lt or P To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the amp button To delete the character at the current cursor position press the button Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long Any characters after the 19th will be deleted After entering the name press The new Picture Set Picture Control Control will appear in the Picture Control list oe EVI Vivid EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait ELS Landscape Grid Adjust Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time Manage Picture Control using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control Save edit menu
46. Print set DPOF will be set to 1 Keeping the 3 button pressed p eas r Eber Mon FEARS press A or W to specify the number of prints up Y a wien to 99 to deselect the picture press V when the _ number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected OSet JZoom OKOK 3 Select imprint options ma Print set DPOF T Select set Highlight the following options and press to toggle the highlighted option on or off to E E Date mor O Imprint date complete the print order without including this information proceed to Step 4 eData imprint Print shutter soeed and aperture on all pictures in print order elmprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order ws Print set DPOF T Select set Highlight Done and press to complete the Done T print order O Data imprint O Imprint date 157 158 V Print Set DPOF To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order pg 153 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print set DPOF option can not be used if there is not enough
47. SB 400 Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB R200 Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet BF 1B and BF 1A Body Caps The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place Accessory terminal accessories Remote controls The D90 is equipped with an accessory terminal for remote cords and GPS devices The terminal is provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Accessory Description Remote This 1 m 3 ft 3 in cord can be used to operate camera remotely to Cord eliminate blur caused by camera movement when shutter release MC DC2 button is pressed or to take pictures at a shutter speed of bulb GPS Unit Connect to accessory terminal to record latitude longitude GP 1 altitude and UTC time with pictures pg 124 ML L3 wireless remote control Use as a remote shutter release for self portraits or to prevent blur caused by camera shake The ML L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery 241 242 EE Approved Memory Cards The following SD
48. Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed 106 WB Qm QUAL WB button Sub command dial White balance amp Incandescent x Fluorescent 3 Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy fy Shade i Choose color temp RRA Preset manual gt White balance gt Ca B uh d 0 d 2 PRE Select RSet White balance s Preset manual Edit comment Select image Copy d 0 PRE Control panel HE Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset manual White balance ra A Incandescent Highlight Preset manual in the white balance Da menu pg 95 and press gt a ie fy Shade i Choose color temp RRA Preset manual gt 2 Selecta preset White balance Highlight the desired preset and press the 2 oats Ql button fi PRE eSelect OWSet 3 Select Edit comment White balance s Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and press gt Set Edit comment Select image Copy d0 4 Edit the comment White balance E GELDO t 0123456789 lt Edit the comment as described on page 169 7 6NBCDEFGHIJKL WNOPQRSTUVWX
49. The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised e Ifthe battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately V Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D90 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs aff
50. a Daa 264 Flash Control The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination with the built in flash or optional SB 900 SB 800 or SB 600 flash units pp 73 234 e i TTL Balanced Fill Flash for Digital SLR Flash output is adjusted for a natural balance between the main subject and the background e Standard i TTL Fill Flash for Digital SLR Flash output is adjusted for the main subject the brightness of the background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional flash unit i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases Shutter Speeds Available with the Built in Flash The following shutter speeds are available with the built in flash when vibration reduction VR is not used Mode Shutter speed Mode Shutter speed T P A 1 200 1 60 S S 200 30 s M7 200 125 S M 200 30 S tin hn Di 200 1 S Slowest shutter speed at which flash will be used can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash shutter speed Flash will still fire at shutter speeds as slow as 30 s when set to slow sync 265 266 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range Flash range varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent
51. a A Incandescent Highlight Preset manual in the white balance DSSA menu pg 95 and press gt A f Shade Choose color temp RRA Preset manual gt 2 Select a destination White balance a Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 Ea FEN and press the amp button d 1 PRE Select OKSet 3 Choose Select image White balance s Preset manual Highlight Select image and press gt ETE Set Edit comment Select image Copy d0 4 Highlight a source image Highlight the source image To view the highlighted image full frame press the amp button DoR OS PRE Zoom OLORY 14 5 Copy white balance Press to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment pg 205 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset 105 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 95 and press gt Select a preset Highlight the desired preset and press the Q amp 3 button To select the highlighted preset and display the fine tuning menu pg 97 without completing the next step press i instead of pressing the 9 button Select Set Highlight Set and press Fine tuning menu for the selected white balance preset is displayed pg 98 Qed button
52. accessories can be connected via a sync cable 238 Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D90 e Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL3e pp 22 23 Additional EN EL3e batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives The EN EL3e can be recharged using an MH 18a or MH 18 quick charger e Multi Power Battery Pack MB D80 The MB D80 takes one or two rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e Li ion battery or six AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries It is equipped with a shutter release Power button AE L AF L button and main and sub sources command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D80 remove the camera battery chamber cover as shown at right e Quick Charger MH 18a pg 22 The MH 18a can be used to recharge EN EL3e battery e ACAdapter EH 5a EH 5 These AC adapters can be used to power the camera for extended periods e DK 20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses Lenses are available with diopters of 5 4 3 2 0 0 5 1 2 and 3 m Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 2 0 to 1 0 m Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved e Magnifying Eyepiece DK 21M The DK 21M increases viewfinder magnification to approximately 1
53. card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card 116 Managing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls EE Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select Rename Manage Picture Control In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight ai Rename D Rename and press P an Load save 2 Select a Pictu re Control Manage Picture Control Rename Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through Tee C 9 and press gt 3 Rename the Picture Control Rename O 1 8 i j 0123456789 lt Rename the Picture Control as described on Sang CREE RATER WNOPQRSTUVWXYZI VIVID 02 S Qacursor input ONOK page 114 EE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select Delete Manage Picture Control In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Saveledit Rename Delete and press gt Load save 2 Select a Pictu re Control Manage Picture Control Delete Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C E C 9 and press gt 3 Select Yes Manage Picture Control Cy Delete Highlight Yes and press to delete the selected Delete Picture Control Picture Control STANDARD 02 117 118 EE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card 1 Select Load save Manage Picture Control In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight S
54. care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection ZN Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection ZN Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire Z Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation Z Observe caution when using the flash e Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns e Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following pre
55. color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired Choosing a Color Temperature At a setting of EI Choose color temp color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Color temperature can also be selected in the shooting menu pg 165 WB button Sub command dial Control panel Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500 K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu C
56. copies created with Trim pg 213 Small picture pg 216 and Image overlay pg 218 copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original while copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images 211 D Lighting D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs 1 Before a After Press A or W to choose the amount of correction performed D Lighting The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy IF Pug gt A the photograph i x B 4 Normal wv Cancel Zoom Ok Save Red Eye Correction This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as g shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correction and AXIO create a copy as described in the following table Note that PETEN aes EER red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding To Description i mn Zoom in Press 8 button to zoom in button to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use 7 E multi selector to view areas of image not OOM Op S visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other area
57. flash Commander mode Built in flash Group A Group B Channel Moe Set ONOK Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp TTL TTL gt CH et Group B M Channel Move S TTL Group A TTL 3 Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions 60 orless 10m 33 ft 30 ad Vv 5m 15 ft or less or less y EGA T rast Camera f KE i built in flash 30 or less F N 5m 15ft or less y 60 or less 7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel Wireless remote sensors on flash units should face camera Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the Speedlight instruction manuals for details 189 8 Raise the built in flash Press the button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock pg 198 can be used if desired 4 Commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from the built in
58. flash particular care is required when not using a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance The Flash Mode Display does not appear in the control panel flash mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the E button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A Hi icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The E4 icon flashes when M is selec
59. flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Optional Flash Units Flash exposure compensation is also available with an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 or SB R200 flash units See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash compensation see Custom Setting b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 177 91 Exposure and Flash Bracketing Bracketing automatically varies selected settings slightly with each shot bracketing the current value The setting affected is chosen with Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 191 below it is assumed that AE amp flash is selected to vary exposure and flash level Other options can be used to vary exposure or flash level separately or to bracket white balance or Active D Lighting 1 Choose the number of shots Press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence two or three No of shots Progress indicator Control panel BKT button Main command dial Viewfinder 2 Select an exposure increment Press the skt button and rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment from values between 0 3 EV and 2 0 EV BKT button Sub command dial Control panel Understanding the Bracketing Display Number of shots Description 4E lt 4ED
60. from your camera please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all who use the product Y Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual The Camera Bod BE Mode ial s cscssssssssssorsesssssssssssesesasacacacnsesees 6 13 Main command ial ssseeeeeeeees 13 2 Eyelet for camera strap uu csessesessessseeseeseees 17 14
61. has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on White Balance White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources if necessary other values can be selected according to the type of source The following options are available in P S A and M modes auto white balance is used in auto and scene modes Option Color temp K Description Camera sets white balance automatically recommended in most situations For best results Auto i default use type G or D lens If built in or optional flash is used white balance reflects conditions in effect when flash fires Incandescent Use under incandescent lighting om Fluorescent Use with the following seven light sources Use under sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues 3 000 Use under warm white fluorescent lights White fluorescent 3 700 Use under white fluorescent lights Cool white fluorescent default for Fluorescent Day white fluorescent 5 000 Use under daylight white fluorescent lights Daylight fluorescent 6 500 Use under daylight fluorescent lights Use under high color temperature light sources e g mercury vapor lamps Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 4 200 Use under c
62. mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The battery may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batterie
63. more information photo Change protect status of highlighted photo Yom See page 139 for more information Return to shooting mode g Display menus MENU See page 159 for more information Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately 135 Calendar Playback To view images taken on a selected date press the 9 button when 72 images are displayed Full frame Thumbnail Calendar playback playback playback Press the 9 button to toggle between the date list and the list of thumbnails for the selected date Use the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list or to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list eS fy Ne Date list bs EES Thumbnail list 21 22 27 ey 28 29 AT 136 The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list Description Toggle between date Press 9 button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail list and thumbnail list list Press again to return to date list 1 i a ae i e Date list Exit to 72 frame playback ee e Thumbnail list Zoom in on highlighted picture highlighted photo Toggle full frame playback Date list View first picture taken on selected date Thumbnail list View highlighted picture e Date list Highlight date e Thumbnail list Highlight picture Highlight dates Highlight images Delete ae Date list Delete all pictures taken on selected date photo
64. of Range D e a a a r 4 2 28 4 56 1012 3ft3in 39ft4in 2 28 4 56 8 O785 2ft4in 27ft Tin 8 a jse f s f n j oe 2na 4 8a TT 16 2ft 13ft 9in ss e n e a osso 2RR TOn s n 6 2 32 0621 2h6ftin n e a2 a oes RRMA Tin e 2 a oen ern a a 06 08 ancen In the following modes the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity when the built in flash is used Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of Mote m oo tooo 0 E E a E S E EL e s 67 8 5 n For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens Specifications EE Nikon D90 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective picture angle Approx 1 5 x lens focal length Nikon DX format Effective pixels Effective pixels 12 3 million Image sensor Image sensor 23 6 x 15 8 mm CMOS sensor Total pixels 12 9 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX 2 software required Storage Image size pixels e 4 288 x 2 848 L e 3 216 x 2 136 M e 2 144 x 1 424 S File format e NEF RAW e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx
65. or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Notice for Customers in Europe CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources and prevent negative consequences for human health This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries All batteries whether marked with this symbol or not are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management and the environment that might result from incorrect disposal e For more information contact the retailer or th
66. or seaside wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly body dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains Monitor wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Lens mirror and viewfinder Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals 243 The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off HE Clean Now 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 2 Display the Clean image sensor menu Highlight Clean image sensor i
67. overexposed S Increase shutter speed 81 A Choose a smaller aperture 82 larger f number Use a higher ISO sensitivity 74 Use flash 70 Subject too dark photo will be e In exposure mode underexposed S Lower shutter speed 81 A Choose a larger aperture 82 smaller f number ni tus amp Selected in exposure Change shutter speed or select 81 83 b inks mode manual exposure mode selected in exposure Change shutter speed or select i 81 83 blinks mode manual exposure mode Y e Optional flash unit that does A 4 not support i TTL flash control blinks attached and set to TTL e Non CPU lens attached Vw a aa Change flash mode setting on optional flash unit or use CPU 235 blinks 236 lens 255 Indicator Control panel Problem Page 4 If indicator blinks for 3 s after Check photo in monitor if blinks flash fires photo may be underexposed adjust settings 128 underexposed and try again Memory insufficient to record further photos at current settings or camera has run out of file or folder numbers CE E No memorycard Insert memory card 29 Release shutter If error persists or appears frequently consult Camera malfunction i i blinks Nikon authorized service representative Indicator Control panel Monitor viewfinder Problem Page Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm memory card that card is correctly inserted e Use approved card
68. pg 35 The focus selector lock can be returned to the L locked position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed See Also Custom Setting a1 AF area mode pg 173 controls how the camera selects the focus point Custom Setting a2 Center focus point pg 174 controls the size of the center focus point Custom Setting a4 AF point illumination 175 controls whether the active focus point is highlighted in the viewfinder 56 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus pg 55 Focus lock is most effective when Single point Dynamic area or 3D tracking 11 points is selected for Custom Setting al AF area mode pg 173 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder 2 Lock focus AF A and AF C autofocus modes pg 54 With the shutter release button pressed halfway press the AE L AF L button to lock both focus and exposure an AE L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder Focus will remain locked while the AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the shutter release butto
69. portraits Use for hand held shots of landscapes E3 Wide area and other non portrait subjects The aor xt Oem default focus point can be selected using the multi selector Use for pin point focus on a selected spot in the frame A tripod is recommended 191 Face priority Monitor iq Normal RM area 3 Check the view in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor and check focus press the amp button Q button Press amp to zoom in up to a maximum of 6 7 x or press amp to zoom out While the view through the lens is Zoomed in a navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor Press the button to start recording pg 50 Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the gt button while the view through the monitor is displayed Press A or W to adjust brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live view release the gt button 4 Choose the focus point Wide and normal area autofocus Rotate the focus Focus selector lock selector lock to and use the multi selector to move the focus point to any point in the frame Return the focus selector lock to L when selection is complete Face priority autofocus A double yellow border will be displayed when the
70. press MENU and press lt q to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the shooting menu tab for more information see page 19 Option See page Option See page Set Picture Control 108 Color space 167 Manage Picture Control 113 Long exp NR 167 Image quality 62 High ISO NR 168 Image size 63 Active folder 169 White balance 95 Multiple exposure 121 ISO sensitivity settings 166 Movie setting 170 Active D Lighting 119 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings pg 108 This option is available in P S A and M modes only Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card pg 113 This option is available in P S A and M modes only Image Quality Choose image quality pg 62 This option is available in all modes Image Size Choose the size at which pictures are recorded pg 63 This option is available in all modes White Balance Adjust white balance settings pg 95 This option is available in P S A and M modes only 165 166 ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity pg 74 This option is available in all modes EE SO Sensitivity Auto Control P S A and M Modes Only If Off the default setting is chosen for ISO sensitivity auto ISO sensitivity settings PLISO sensitivity 200 gt control ISO
71. removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens cap rear cover and camera body cap EE Vibration Reduction VR AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G VR lenses support vibration reduction VR which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV at a focal length of 105mm Nikon measurements effects vary with the user and shooting conditions To use vibration reduction slide the VR switch to ON Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter release button is pressed halfway reducing the effects of camera shake on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of framing the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual modes When the camera is panned vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan if the camera is panned horizontally for example vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod but leave it on if the tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod Y CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture
72. reset when insert a new memory card File number sequence 182 How do reset file numbering to 1 vi Taking Photographs Question Key phrase See page Is there an easy way to take snapshots Auto mode 34 Is there an easy way to take more creative shots Scene modes 41 mode 34 Can take pictures without the flash Flash mode 71 ISO sensitivity 74 How do I bring out a portrait subject Portrait mode 41 How can I get good landscape shots Landscape mode 41 How do I take close ups of small objects Close up mode 42 How do I freeze a moving subject Sports mode 42 Can include night backgrounds in my portraits Night portrait mode 42 How do take a lot of photographs quickly Release mode 64 Can shoot a self portrait Self timer 66 Is there a remote control for this camera Remote control 68 How do adjust exposure P S A and M modes 78 How do freeze or blur moving objects Mode S shutter priority auto 81 How do I blur background details shies a 82 Can make photos brighter or darker Exposure compensation 90 How do I make a time exposure Long time exposures 85 How do use the flash Flash photography 70 Can the flash fire automatically when needed How do keep the flash from fring ees How do I prevent red eye Red eye reduction 71 Can control how the camera focuses Autofocus 54 How do focus on a moving subj
73. ring pg 228 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number See the lens manual for details Vibration Reduction Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect If power to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on the lens may rattle when shaken This is not a malfunction and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on Vibration reduction is disabled while the built in flash is charging When vibration reduction is active the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released This does not indicate a malfunction Basic Setup A language selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on Choose a language and set the time and date Note that if the time and date are not set will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded with photographs will be incorrect 1 Turn the camera on Power switch ZNA TE A language selection dialog will be displayed 2 Selecta language Language Dk Dansk De Deutsch Press A or W to highlight the desired language and press y E Es Espa ol Fi Suomi Fr Frangais It Italiano NI Nederlands 3 Choose a time zone Tine i London Casablanca UTC O 01 01 2008 00 00 22 A time zone selection dialog will be displayed Press 4 or gt to highlight the local time zone the UTC field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Univ
74. selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue 97 98 3 Press K Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the control panel EE The WB Button At settings other than KI Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis pg 97 to fine tune white balance when or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 97 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired see below Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a 4 gt icon appears in the control panel WB button Sub command dial Control panel gt Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 is a measure of
75. space on the memory card to store the print order NEF RAW photographs pg 62 can not be selected using this option JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created Menu Guide The current menu is displayed by pressing the MENU button to select from the menus listed below press lt This chapter describes the options available in the menus below gt The Playback Menu Managing Images scsscssscsscssssscssscsscsssssscsssssecssseeees 160 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options ccsccsccsscssscsssssssssccsccssscessesccencenees 165 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera SettingS cscsssssssssssssssssssessesserees 171 Tlie Setup Men Camera SetuP eneee e er E ET 202 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched CopieS sesssrssorosesorssososesososesososesose 209 E Recent Settings iH My Menu sesessesssesesessososeseseososssosesescosososesesessosososeseseosososesssses 224 IDOE og gt The Playback Menu Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below To display the playback menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or F to highlight the playback menu tab for more information see page 19 Option See page Option See page Delete 162 Rotate tall 1
76. ss ss 200 3 Active D Lighting s sssessssessseesssessseesssesss 119 Tip isplay sscsscsssssscsssecersessssscsssnsesnaeees 182 A Picture COntrol esesesesesesseseseseseseeeeseseseseese 108 12 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings 5 button flash mode and roar flash compensation BKT button bracketing Sub command dial i4 button exposure compensation J button release mode on WB button white balance QET ISO button ISO sensitivity Q QUAL button image quality image size Nikon EE mage Quality and Size Set image quality pg 62 537 Q QUAL button Main command Control panel dial 13 14 Choose an image size pg 63 Ton A Q QUAL button UA N Control panel dial EE Autofocus Mode Choose an autofocus mode pg 54 AF button Main S Control 2 dial EE Release Mode Choose a release mode al pg 64 j AA JRA j E button Main command Control panel dial EE SO Sensitivity Set ISO sensitivity pg 74 al QE IS0 button Main command Control panel dial EE Exposure Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed exposure mode P pg 80 Mode P Main command Control panel dial Cho
77. the gt button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off HDMI pg 203 At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high definition device The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu pg 203 147 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to use the supplied UC E4 USB cable to connect the camera to a computer Before Connecting the Camera Before connecting the camera install the software on the supplied Software Suite CD see the Install Guide for more information To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately HE Supported Operating Systems The camera can be connected to computers running the following operating systems e Windows Windows Vista Service Pack 1 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate and Windows XP Service Pack 3 Home Edition Professional Users of Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 can transfer pictures by inserting the camera memory card in a card reader or card slot e Macintosh Mac OS X version 10 3 9 10 4 11 10 5 3 See the websites listed on page xviii for the latest information on supported operating systems EE Supplied Software
78. the AE L AF L button is pressed and remains locked fa AE lock hold until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off The AE L AF L button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus Press the AE L AF L button to lock flash value built in flash and SB 900 FV lock SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only pg 198 Press again to cancel FV lock Focus and exposure lock while the AE L AF L button is pressed AF ON 200 f5 Customize Command Dials This option available in all shooting modes controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No the default option for normal command dial operation or Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D80 At the default setting of Off the main command dial controls shutter speed and Change the sub command dial controls aperture If On is selected the main command main sub dial will control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D80 At the default setting of On the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is used to display additional photo
79. the right Select shiitiiniitiite O to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right This option is available in all shooting modes 201 202 T The Setup Menu Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below To display the setup menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the setup menu tab for more information see page 19 Option See page Option See page Format memory card 202 Image comment 205 LCD brightness 202 Auto image rotation 205 Clean image sensor 244 Image dust off ref photo 206 Lock mirror up for cleaning 246 Battery info 208 Video mode 203 GPS 208 HDMI 203 Eye Fi upload 2 208 World time 204 Firmware version 208 Language 204 2 Only available when compatible Eye Fi 1 Not available when battery is low memory card is inserted pg 208 Format Memory Card Format the card Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required Y During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the w f and 3 buttons for about two seconds pg 75 LCD Brightness Press A or W to choose from seven settings for monitor LCD brightness brightness Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness
80. the shutter release button is 70 pressed halfway and fire when the picture is taken Flash mode T P mode amp flash off Flash will not fire even when lighting is poor 71 aaaeaualit NORM Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of 62 aad JPEG Normal roughly 1 8 Ideal for snapshots Image size L Large Images are 4 288 x 2 848 pixels in size 63 s One picture is taken each time the shutter release Release mode 64 Single frame button is pressed The camera automatically selects single servo autofocus if the subject is stationary continuous AF A a aes Autofocus mode servo autofocus if the subject is in motion No 54 Auto select picture will be taken if the camera is unable to focus AF area mode Auto area The camera automatically selects the focus point 173 Step 4 Frame the Photograph 1 Ready the camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body stable In mode shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor use of a tripod is recommended Hold the camera as shown at right when framing photographs in portrait tall orientation For information on framing photographs in the monitor in live view mode see page 43 2 Frame the photograph Fr
81. to proceed to Step 4 Grid Confirm 4 Select a destination Manage Picture Control wy Save as Choose a destination for the custom Picture e Control C 1 through C 9 and press P ae ECS Unused ECS Unused ECT Unused 115 5 Name the Picture Control Set Picture Control Cy ENL Neutral EVI Vivid Name the Picture Control as described on page FNC Monochrome EPT Portrait 114 The new Picture Control will appear in the mp e e EC VIVID 02 Picture Control list and can be renamed at any SET al time using the Rename option in the Manage GD Grid CAdiust Picture Control menu Manage Picture Control Save edit Delete Load save EE Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select Copy to card Manage Picture Control Load save After displaying the Load save menu as described in Step 1 on page 115 highlight Copy to card and press gt 2 2 Select a Pictu re Control Manage Picture Control g Copy to card Highlight a custom Picture Control and press gt n al 3 Choose a destination Manage Picture Control s Choose destination Choose a destination from slots 1 through 99 Cee and press to save the selected Picture Control TTI iA to the memory card Any Picture Controls that me may already have been saved to the selected C107 Unused slot will be overwritten Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory
82. use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded for more information see the websites listed on page xviii Results are not guaranteed with other lenses Fisheye Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye Fisheye EEE lens Press to increase the effect this also increases the amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image lt q to reduce it Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs EE Making a Side by Side Comparison 1 Selecta picture Use the multi selector to select a picture and press Only retouched copies shown by a k4 icon or photographs that have been retouched NORMAL can be selected 15 09 2008 10 14 08 04288x2848 2 Select Side by side comparison Small picture Highlight Side by side comparison and press P Qk 9 Distortion control K Fisheye m O Side by side comparison al Cancel 3 Compare the copy with the original Options used to created copy The source image is displayed on the left the Side bysidd comparison retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press A V 4 or P as indicated by the arrow adjacent to the highlighted image to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view t
83. viewfinder Icon Description BW Displayed when a monochrome Picture Control is selected lt a Displayed when the battery is low W Displayed when no memory card is inserted These warnings are not displayed if Off is selected This option is available in all shooting modes 181 182 d5 Screen Tips Choose On the default setting to display tips for items selected in the shooting information display Off to turn tip display off This option is available in all shooting modes d6 CL Mode Shooting Speed This option available in all shooting modes determines the maximum frame advance rate in HiL continuous low speed release mode Choose from values between one and four frames per second fps the default setting is 3 fos Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds d7 File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option available in all shooting modes controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is
84. zoom ring Focusing Autofocus with Silent Wave Motor manual focus manual focus supported when A M switch is set to A or M Focus can be adjusted by rotating lens focusing ring after locking focus in single servo autofocus Do not use focusing ring while camera is focusing Vibration reduction Lens shift method using voice coil motors VCMs Closest focus distance 0 45 m 1 ft 5 7 in at all zoom settings Diaphragm Seven blade diaphragm with rounded blades and fully automatic aperture Aperture range f 3 5 22 at 18 mm f 5 6 38 at 105 mm Metering Maximum aperture Attachment size 67 mm P 0 75 mm Dimensions Approx 76 mm diameter x 89 mm 3 0 x 3 5 in from surface of bayonet mount to end of lens Weight Approx 420 g 14 8 02 Lens hood HB 32 available separately attaches as shown below B The following accessories can not be used teleconverters all types PK auto extension rings all types K rings all types BR 4 auto rings bellow attachments all types and SX 1 attachment rings Other accessories may also be incompatible See the accessory manual for details 273 274 EE Supported Standards DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File Systems DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the me
85. 00 mm 2 5m 8 ft 2in 1 The built in flash can cover the angle of view of a lens with a focal length of 18 mm at 16 mm the flash will be unable to light the entire subject 2 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24 mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges With the exceptions of the Al S ED 200mm f 2 and Al ED 200mm f 2 the built in flash can also be used with Al and Al modified Nikkor and Nikon Series E non CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18 200 mm At the 35 mm zoom position Al S 25 50mm f 4 Al 25 50 mm f 4 and Al S 35 70mm lenses must be used at ranges of 1 0 m 3ft 3 in or more Al 50 300 mm f 4 5 Al modified 50 300 mm f 4 5 Al S 50 300 mm f 4 5 ED and Al modified 85 250mm f 4 lenses must be used at zoom positions of 135 mm or above Al 50 300 f 4 5 ED lenses at 105 mm or above AF S 28 70 mm f 2 8D ED AF S VR 200 400 mm f 4G ED Les Min range 25 m e Zin AF S DX NIKKOR 10 24mm f 3 5 4 5G ED aa ea 2 0 m 6 ft Tin AF S DX 12 24mm f 4G ED a a AF S DX NIKKOR 16 85 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR 2 0m 6ft 7in 20m 6ft 7in AE ae 28 mm 35 mm 1 0m 3ft 3in 1 5 m 4ft Tin AF S DX 17 55 mm f 2 8G ED 10m 3 ft 3in AF 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D ED 1 0m 3ft 3 in AF S DX 18 70mm f 3 5 4 5G ED 1 0m 3ft 3in 25m 8ft 2in AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105mm 3 5 5 6G ED VR VEL ae AF S DX 18 135mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 1 5m 4 ft 11 in AF S DX VR 18 200 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 24mm 35 m
86. 0001 JPG Images recorded at a Shooting menu gt Color space gt Adobe RGB pg 167 have names that begin with an underscore e g DSC0001 JPG 61 62 Image Quality The camera supports the following image quality options listed in descending order by image quality and file size Option _File type Description Raw 12 bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card Choose for images that will be processed on a computer JPEG NEF RAW NEF copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu pg 220 or software such as ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 240 Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image JPEG fine quality JPEG normal Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal JPEG default image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one fine quality JPEG fine JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one normal quality JPEG normal JPEG JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one basic quality JPEG basic JPEG image Image quality can be set by pressing the amp QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control pa
87. 1 180 d2 Viewfinder grid display d3 ISO display and adjustment R Reset Custom Settings The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Page d Shooting display d4 Viewfinder warning display 181 d5 Screen tips 182 d6 CL mode shooting speed 182 d7 File number sequence 182 d8 Shooting info display 183 d9 LCD illumination 183 d10 Exposure delay mode 183 d11 Flash warning 183 d12 MB D80 battery type 184 e Bracketing flash e1 Flash shutter speed 185 e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash 185 e3 Modeling flash 191 e4 Auto bracketing set 191 e5 Auto FP 195 e6 Bracketing order 195 f Controls f1 8 switch 196 f2 OK button shooting mode 196 f3 Assign FUNC button 197 f4 Assign AE L AF L button 200 f5 Customize command dials 201 f6 No memory card 201 f7 Reverse indicators 201 Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings See 172 Option page 260 for a list of default settings Custom Settings are not reset when a two button reset is performed Description Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings pg 260 No Exit without changing Custom Settings a Autofocus a1 AF area Mode This option available in all shooting modes determines how the focus point for autofocus is selected Choose from the following options Option 1 Single point Dynamic area Ce Auto area 3D tracking f
88. 3 shots unmodified negative positive J IE 4 2 shots unmodified positive 2 shots unmodified negative par pa os M w m 92 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera will vary exposure and flash level with each shot At default settings the first shot will be taken at the current values for exposure and flash compensation and the following shots at modified values If the bracketing sequence consists of three shots the bracketing increment will be subtracted from the current values in the second shot and added in the third shot bracketing the current values The modified values can be higher or lower than the maximum and minimum values for exposure and flash compensation The modified shutter soeed and aperture are displayed in the control panel and viewfinder While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel The lf segment will disappear from the indicator when the unmodified shot is taken the B indicator when the shot with the negative increment is taken and the 4 indicator when the shot with the positive increment is taken ULg Exposure increment 0 EV Exposure increment 1 EV Exposure increment 1 EV a gt lt To cancel bracketing press the BkT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and m is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will
89. 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed in the control panel pg 71 Take pictures The flash will pop up as required when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and fire when a photograph is taken EE Using the Built in Flash P S A and M Modes 1 70 Choose a shooting mode Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode Raise the flash Press the 4 button to raise the flash Choose a flash mode Press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed in the control panel pg 71 Select a metering method and set exposure Take pictures The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken Flash Mode Press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed in the control panel amp AUTO button Main command dial Control panel The current flash mode is displayed in the control panel as shown below red eye reduction Use for portraits Red eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires reducing red eye 5 off Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back lit x 5 AUTO auto flash When lighting is poor or subject is back lit flash pops up i automatically when shutter release button is pressed halfway and fires as AUTO required SLOW REAR SLOW slow sync Shutter speed slows automatically to capture back
90. 5 JPG NORMAL LSS 15 09 2008 11 03 4288x2848 To Ue Description View additional Press to view photographs in order recorded 4 to view photographs photographs in reverse order View photo Press A or F to view information about current photograph information pg 129 View thumbnails See page 135 for more information on the thumbnail display Zoom in on photograph See page 138 for more information on playback zoom a Confirmation dialog will be displayed Press t again to delete photo oe To protect image or to remove protection from protected image press button pg 139 Delete images Change protect status Return to shooting mode Display menus MENU See page 159 for more information Create retouched copy of current photograph pg 209 If GR current picture is marked with icon to show that it is a movie pressing starts movie playback pg 52 gt Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately he Retouch photo or play movie Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 163 Image Review g When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 163 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s the default setting after shooting See Also See Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 180 for informati
91. 6 total number of images 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 163 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b4 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 178 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached 131 EE Shooting Data Page 2 1 2 p 3 WHITE BALANCE AUTO 0 0 4 COLOR SPACE sRGB 5 PICTURE CNTRL STANDARD 6 QUICK ADJUST 7 SHARPENING 8 CONTRAST 9 BRIGHTNESS 10 SATURATION 11 HUE 12 13 1 Protect status ss 139 5 Picture Control 108 10 Saturation 4 111 2 Retouch indicator 209 6 Quick adjust 2 111 Filter effects sises 111 E 3 White balance veces 95 Original Picture 11 er 111 Color temperature 99 CONO iaia 114 TORING tee treepieianiae 111 White balance fine 7 Sharpening 111 12 Camera name WUNING scri 97 8 Contrast esees000000000 111 13 Frame number Preset manual 000 100 9 Brightness ween 111 total number of images 4 Color Space 167 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 163 2 Standard Vivid Portrait and Landscape Picture Controls only 3 Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls 4 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls 5 Monochrome Picture Controls only EE Shooting Data Page 3 HI 1S0 NORM B 3 i 4 ACT D LIGHT NORMAL 5 RETOUCH D LIG
92. 63 Playback folder 162 Pictmotion 141 Hide image 162 Slide show 143 Display mode 163 Print set DPOF 157 Image review 163 Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for Delete pg 162 Hide image pg 162 Pictmotion pg 163 and direct printing pg 150 EE Thumbnail Selection To choose pictures from a list of thumbnails select the Selected Select Set Print B select or Print DPOF option and follow the steps below 1 Highlight a picture ra Delete Selected Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press Taal and hold the amp button D gt Syn E Set Zoom OOK 2 Select the highlighted picture button Press the button to select the WEN e highlighted picture Selected Cd dd pictures are marked by an icon O When selecting pictures for printing oe press the amp button and press A or Set Zoom WOK to choose the number of copies 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a picture highlight it and press the 9 button 160 4 Press to complete the operation wa Selected Delete A confirmation dialog will be displayed 3 images highlight Yes and press 68 EE Date Selection To choose a date select the Select date option and follow the steps below 1 Highlight a date pa Select date Press A or W to highlight a date oe Confir
93. 87 Flash shutter speed 185 Flash Warning 183 Flexible program 80 Fn button 197 198 f number 82 228 Focal length 228 Focal length scale 25 Focal plane mark 60 Focus 54 55 57 59 autofocus 54 55 57 electronic rangefinder 60 229 indicator 38 57 60 lock 57 Manual focus 59 mode 54 Auto select 36 54 continuous servo AF 54 selector 54 59 single servo AF 54 point 45 54 57 173 174 175 tracking 56 173 3D 56 173 Focus point wrap around 175 Focusing screen 267 Format 30 202 Format memory card 202 Front curtain sync 71 FV lock 198 G GPS 124 133 241 connecting 124 data 133 GPS 124 Green 97 H H Sensitivity 74 HDMI 147 203 274 HDMI 203 Help 18 21 Hide image 162 High definition 147 203 274 High ISO NR 168 Highlights 131 163 Histogram 130 163 l Image comment 205 Image Dust Off ref photo 206 Image file 274 Image overlay 218 Image quality 62 Image review 163 Image size 63 Index print 156 In focus indicator 38 57 60 Information 129 163 ISO display and adjustment 181 ISO sensitivity 74 166 ISO sensitivity 74 ISO sensitivity auto control 166 Maximum sensitivity 166 Minimum shutter speed 166 ISO sensitivity settings 166 i TTL 188 233 265 J JPEG 61 62 JPEG basic 62 JPEG fine 62 JPEG normal 36 62 L L Image size 36 63 L Sensitivity 74 Language 27 204 LCD 8 183 202 LCD brightness 202 LCD illumination 183 Lens 25
94. 9 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu PLAYBACK MENU z a a Playback fold NCD30 Press to position the cursor in the selected f kisima Si Display mode menu 4 image review ON E Rotate tall Pictmotion El Slide show 5 Highlight a menu item PLAYBACK MENU e Delete a Playback fold Press A or W to highlight a menu item s Hide image _ Display mode Image review ON F EM Rotate tall 0 Pictmotion g El Slide show l 6 Display options Press to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or W to highlight an option 8 Select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button Note the following e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing 9 there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway pg 35 Using the Command Dials The main command dial can be used to move the cursor up and down the sub command dial to move the cursor left and right The sub command dial can not be used to make a selection Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor SEEE help can be displayed by pressing the button A descri
95. AF assist illuminator sssesssseesseessseesssesss 174 3 Focal plane mark ssssessesesssscccsesercessessee 60 Self timer laMp ssssesssseessssessssseesssseessseessssseessss 67 4 Accessory shoe for optional flash Red eye reduction lamp s sssesssessseesssersseee 71 Ei a eE RA 233 15 Sub command dial sssssesessooesoocscecossssssessss 13 5 Accessory Shoe COVE ssssssessssssssesosessseceeee 233 16 Fn button ssseesseessseessseesesessssessssesssee 197 198 6 Power SWItCh sssssssssssssesseeerersssssssssssseerrrersrsssss 34 17 Depth of field preview button 82 7 Shutter release DUttON uw cece sssessesssessessseee 38 18 Speaker 8 exposure compensation button 90 FRY Body Cap csscscscssscscsccscscacsscnsssencssenseeess 240 Two button reset button uuu eeceseeeeeeees 75 20 CPU contacts 9 Z3 metering Dutton sssesssersssesssessssesss 87 21 Mounting inde X ss esseesssessssessseessssesssersssees 25 n format DUON ssssssssessessessrseeeessssssrereesssse 30 22 Lens MOUNt ssssssesssssssesssssereesssrsresesrsreessssrreess 60 10 release mode button ou eee 64 23 Tripod socket 11 AF autofocus mode button eee 54 24 Battery chamber COV f ssssessesssssssersssssssrecsess 23 Two button reset button s s ssssssesesesesee0s 75 25 Battery chamber Cover latch c cccccccceee 23 12 Control panel s ssseessessseesseesseesssesseessersseesseesse 7 N Con OO
96. Custom Settings The Setup Menu The Retouch Menu Recent Settings z My Menu Technical Notes DOO Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index New Features Question Key phrase See page Can use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 43 How do I shoot movies Recording movies 50 Can control how photos are processed Picture Controls 108 How dol preserve details in shadows and eee highlights Active D Lighting 119 How do keep the subject in focus when changing 3D tracking 173 the composition How do remove dust from the low pass filter eieanimaaesencer 503 protecting the image sensor Frequently Asked Questions Question Key phrase See page How do use the menus Using the menus 18 How do get more information on a menu Help 21 Can I get quick access to frequently used settings My Menu 225 Can get quick access to recently used settings Recent settings 224 What do these indicators mean Control panel viewfinder 7 9 What does this warning mean Error messages and displays 255 How many more shots can take with this card Sale Crone 35 remaining How much charge does the battery have left Battery level 34 What does exposure mean and how does it work Exposure 79 What do do with the viewfinder eyepiece cap Self timer remote control 66 68 What optional flash units Speedlights can use
97. FICC SSSOM SS vas casscacvcvescceusacusnusnndecseesesnsescocacoaut ccseeusasavea decease cijayeauatonstarece vem eaunateotnners 239 Carlini Or We Cail terran ctv ravienienraenn EE anne 243 O eo eee ener eens pen enen weiner enone er eerie ere ee enn eee een 243 Rie AI MTN a PAETA E S AE ats aca dass cage soars cov E ass agen eens E 243 TS OW AS Se FU O aprenen EENE E 244 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions sss essseesssessssessseessseessseessseesssesssseosss 248 Troubleshooting ansni E ebtsitiaentoutatu 250 DDI Y E T 250 SHOOTING AINMOGES accecssrecsreaneaeicsecetieraunsotsaeareerrarinirn NR E 251 Shooting 4 Z lM XM and I modes wu eeccescssssssssssssessssessssessseessseessessseessseen 252 SNOOUNG P S A M ers asses easeeacancentdeenie ae arent een aie eae ne 252 PVA GIR a evcercasivecassaci E E aes vecadisevterapeviow E aerate 253 MI ENOO ora R ER vena A E 254 Error MOSS aG aranan EA E EAA A 255 ROD TOD caaea E S A eeu tanneaiat 258 Available Settings and Defaults e ssssseesssseessseeesssesssseessssersssseesssserosseesssseesssseessseees 258 Memory Card AICI EY ssnin rin Nar SA E ENS ENNE eis 262 PPO ERO O I Peer ee ee A T eer ee 263 Bracketing Programs cassie cinsisesncsuncschsessvsanstscdesecsanersaarasedieststupevotbuctaanpenneasenenestnnistiventes 264 FPC ORTO E E E oe 265 Shutter Speeds Available with the Built in Flash ssesssesssesssesssessserssosssesseessesssesss 265 Aperture Sensi
98. G DIS Ol AY cecsscese acc erea tesa aerate hed eae ik auca bocce aaa eben 180 VBC ansa cc Sscussaais backend tectostawctanaiacaseanenccders otuceatonessenecln earnestianinstonensia tenets 180 d2 Viewfinder Grid Display ccsssssssssssssscssssssessssecsssscsessssecsesessecsssecsssssseessscseesees 181 d3 ISO Display and Adjustment cccssssessssssecsssescsssececsesessssecscseseesssecessessssssecess 181 d4 Viewfinder Warning Display ccssssssssssesssssssecssssssscsssecsessssecsssesssescseesssecseesees 181 do SECC ATO Sicixsreseatsses tales caesascntecsev a a ne eneaaties 182 C6 CL Mode Shooting Speed ccsssssscssecsssssscessecsssssecsssecsssesscsssecsssecscssssesesecseneess 182 G7 File Number SCQUCIICE nsien EA A ARA 182 dg SMOOUNG IMIS DISPLAY aserra a A E T 183 xii dX ECD UMmiNatiOn sscccdectceiecevcesacacttcedtee erie a N tuouls 183 d10 Exposure Delay MOde ccsssssssssssssssssssssssssscessssscesssssssssecsssessesssscsssescsssececseess 183 LFF SKWADRA 183 GID MB D80 Battery TYPE ievseeisesscitvexcseztscveddeacorsseevsoentedebvarcesesvsunthedeepscreet tasdeowersanienteaees 184 Se Bracketing Flas Pansi ae a a aE aaa A 185 eT Fasmonutter Speeds onrtetecs vii ieaveedetir neneaguntenteawe 185 e2 Flash Critrl for Built in Flash uuu sessessssscsssossessssscsecsssscesssssecessecsssecsecnsessescasees 185 OF Modeling Fias hanasu a canias es samecneenrtanieuenn meee 191 e4 Auto Bracketing Seb aac cunnnienire
99. HT ING WARM TONE K CYANOTYPE TRIM 6 a SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 1 Protect status 139 4 Active D Lighting 166 8 Frame number 2 Retouch indicator 209 5 Retouch history 209 total number of images 3 High ISONR seen 168 6 Image commenrt 205 Long exposure NR 167 7 Camera name Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 163 132 EE GPS Data 1 2 3 n SVN en id 35 36 371 4 LONGITUDE E p EEC 43 696 5 p GN 35m p 6 aie 15 09 2008 01 15 29 P lt A NIKON D90 7 8 1 Protect status 139 5 Altitude 8 Frame number 2 Retouch indicator 209 6 Coordinated Universal total number of images 3 Latitude Time UTC E 4 Longitude 7 Camera name Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken pg 124 133 134 Hi Overview Data P 1 250 a _ TTA F5 6 E3200 4 1 3 Bi4 1 0 4 REAR GPS 1 Frame number total number of images 2 Protect status 3 Camera name 4 Retouch indicator 209 17 Picture Control 108 18 Active D Lighting 119 19 File NAME a seseseseeeees 61 20 Image quality 63 21 IMAGE SIZE eee eeeceeteseees 62 22 Time of recording 27 5 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image pg 130 Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel 9 10 11 12 Ima
100. K sce cceseressocececsesscesssnstesterncsosnetsarraresscessuasenaumaneretmarweraramnnens 135 Calendar Playback c cscsssssesscssssssssssssscessssesscsssssscsssesecscsssesseassesecessssessesssecseaesesesssesecees 136 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM sssssssssssscsssssssscssssssssssssssessssesscscssssesssesssecsees 138 Protecting Photographs from Deletion cccessssssesecsesessssescsscsescsesseseseessseseeseseseee 139 Deleting Individual Photographs uu eesssssscssssesesesecescsesesessesesesesescsessesesesesesseseseees 140 PICO O eaae cece ren steces E E EEE E EE cesnscetsreeteessnateess 141 MAES NONE aea a E ETE AE AAA E E veseroaninceeess 143 Connections 145 Viewing Photographs on TV sssesssesssesssesssessseosseosseesseesseesseesseesseeoseeoseesseosseosseesseesseesseees 146 Standard Definition DeViCeS ssessesesssseessssseeeesssssesesseseessssseresssserssssesereossseeesssssressssseees 146 High Definition Devices s sesseessseeessseessseesssseesssseessseeesseesoseeeosseeonsserossseesseerosserossseessssee 147 Connecting to A COMpUter ssessesessessessessesessessessoseosessessesessessoseeseosesseseoseseoseoseosesseseoseosess 148 Before Connecting the CaMera sssesssseesssseesssseessseeesseesosseesssseeosssresseerosseeossseesssserossee 148 Connecting the CamMera eseesesessseessseesseesssesssseesseeoseessseeosseesseroseeosseeosseesseeoseeossseossersseesss 149 Pronn PROLOG ADS aariaa 150 Menu G
101. M with electronic D Z a T Lens accessory rangefinder x 0 Z P S A 3D Color CJ TYDE GOT D AF Nikkor AF Sle TNIKKOe a Mi PC E NIKKOR series va v v vvo PC Micro 85mm f 2 8D ee ee AF S AF I teleconverter YV VW vW Y VW Other AF Nikkor except lenses for F3AF W v v v W v r ALP Nikkor v wv y viy 1 IX Nikkor lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting 5 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems may not function as expected when the lens is shifted and or tilted or an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 6 AF S or AF I lens required see below With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 8 When AF 80 200 mm f 2 8 AF 35 70 mm f 2 8 AF 28 85 mm f 3 5 4 5 New or AF 28 85 mm f 3 5 4 5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance the in focus indicator may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus Focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus 9 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF I teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF I lenses N e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED II e AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED e AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED e AF I 500mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 300mm f 2 8D
102. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA DIO User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from The Table of Contents op viii xiii Find items by function or menu name Rg The Q amp A Index pp iv vii Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index re The Index pp 276 278 Search by key word Error Messages pp 255 257 Ifa warning is displayed in the control panel viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting pp 250 254 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safet Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety pg xiv Help Use the camera s on board help feature for help on menu items and other topics See page 21 for details Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately L1 D90 digital camera I Body cap _IBM 10LCD monitor L1 DK 5 eyepiece cap pg 3 pp 3 240 cover pg 17 pg 17 I EN EL3e LI MH 18a quick _J AN DC1 strap I BS 1 accessory shoe rechargeable charger with power pg 17 cover pg 233 Li ion battery with cable pg 22 terminal cover pp 22 23 _I Warr
103. Optional flash units 233 What lenses can use Lenses 228 What accessories are available for my camera Accessories 239 What memory cards can use Approved memory cards 242 What software is available for my camera Accessories 240 Who can ask to repair or inspect my camera Servicing the camera 247 How do I clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 243 Camera Setup Question Key phrase See page How do I stop parts of my photos from blinking _ Photo info highlights ee How do focus the viewfinder Viewfinder focus 32 How do I keep the monitor from turning off Monitor off 180 How do set the clock How do set the clock for daylight saving time World time 204 How do I change time zones when travel How do adjust monitor brightness LCD brightness 202 How do restore default settings Two button reset 75 How do turn off the light on the front of the eee Nua aator 174 camera Can display a framing grid in the viewfinder Grid display 181 How do I view the control panel in the dark LCD illuminator 8 196 How do I keep the shutter speed and aperture Aito meteror 35 179 displays from turning off How do I change the self timer delay Self timer 66 179 How do I change the remote delay Remote control 68 180 How do I keep the camera from beeping Beep 180 Can I display the menus in a different language Language 204 How do I keep the file number from being
104. PU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not 25 locked at highest f number e Mode dial rotated to with shutter speed set to tin by Final photo is larger than Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage is area shown in viewfinder approximately 95 e Rotate focus mode selector to AF 83 54 Photos are out of focus je Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual 57 59 focus or focus lock Focus does not lock when Use AE L AF L button to lock focus when AF C autofocus shutter release button is mode is selected or when photographing moving subjects 54 pressed halfway in AF A mode Image size can not be r hanged Image quality set to NEF RAW 62 e Unlock focus selector lock 56 Auto area selected for AF area mode choose another 173 Can not select focus point mode Press shutter release button halfway to turn monitor off 35 or activate exposure meters Camera is slow to record l l photos Turn long exposure noise reduction off 167 e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise 74 reduction on 167 Shutter speed is slower than 8 s use long exposure noise 167 reduction Mode dial rotated to la or select another mode 41 AF assist lamp does not light for continuous servo 54 autofocus Choose AF S In single point dynamic area or 3D tracking AF select center focus point Off selected for Custom Setting a3 Built in AF assist 174 illuminator Illuminator has turned off
105. SS ONL OF S NOON e a Par RT a A A T ey SPOT PMR ARETE SE 39 Creative Photography Scene Modes csssccssssssscsssscssscsssscssscsssssssscssssssessssesees 41 FEM OM UA ese aa A cases cous cas sles A A eet sen greases ast E A a oeseaas 41 Land sca DE A NA A E E ie E A COE RT 41 Eo eU o E T E acer E tas A E A A er a Vcr ats 42 ES E E E E E ct E E Milas tne ea ee 42 INIGMURORUAIL ane a E A A A E E rotte 42 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View s ssseesseeseessocesocesoessocesocesocesoeessoessees 43 Basi Play DAGK ss ees SAAE AACE AAEE Aa AA ESEA OAAS EAT TEASA AASA AAAA i 48 Deleting Unwanted PRotogra phs aaae A E AN aT 49 Recording and Viewing Movies Live View essessseesocesocesocesocesseesocesocesooesseesoceso 50 Use a CPU Lens Auto and scene modes are only available with CPU lenses If these modes are selected when a non CPU lens is attached the shutter release will be disabled 33 Point and Shoot Photography G and Modes This section describes how to take photographs in amp auto mode an automatic point and shoot mode in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions and in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit To take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in control of other settings rotate the mode dial to to select auto flash off mode Step 1 Turn the Camera On 1 Tu
106. ST area and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current PE CHULLIA cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the Name area desired character in the keyboard area and press the amp button To delete the character at the current cursor position press the 7 button Press to save changes and return to the shooting menu or press MENU to exit without creating a new folder or changing the folder name Cursor input GKHOK Y Folder Names On the memory card folder names are preceded by a three digit folder number assigned automatically by the camera e g JOONCD90 Each folder can contain up to 999 photographs During shooting pictures are stored in the highest numbered folder with the selected name Ifa photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a photograph numbered 9999 the camera will create a new folder by adding one to the current folder number e g 101NCD90 The camera treats folders with the same name but different folder numbers as the same folder For example if the folder NIKON is selected for Active folder photographs in all folders named NIKON 100NIKON 101NIKON 102NIKON etc will be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder pg 162 Renaming changes all folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact 169 Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to three exposures pg 121 This option is available in P S A and M mod
107. T A T A E E A eoosoeoees 119 MUPIS EXPO SULO a aea ea Aaa AAE A AA EAA AEA LEE SAA aA 121 THE GRA GPS UNIE eA A Aaa AAA NEEE OEE E AETR Ai 124 77 78 Shutter Speed and Aperture P S A and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure pg 80 Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings Shutter priority auto User chooses shutter speed camera selects aperture for best pg 81 results Use to freeze or blur motion User chooses aperture camera selects shutter soeed for best results Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus Programmed auto Aperture priority auto pg 82 User controls both shutter speed and aperture Set shutter soeed M Manual pg 83 ie eae k to iwa or for long time exposures Y Lens Aperture Rings When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring pg 228 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode M when aperture can be adjusted manually using the lens aperture ring in other modes the shutter release will be disabled The camera exposure meter auto ISO sensitivity control and variety of other features can not be used pg 165 See also
108. Use the ISO sensitivity auto control option in the shooting menu pg 165 to enable auto ISO sensitivity control in P S A and M modes Custom Setting b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 177 determines the size of the increments used for setting shutter speed and aperture Custom Setting f5 Customize command dials pg 201 determines the roles played by the main and sub command dials in setting shutter speed and aperture Shutter Speed and Aperture The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter speed and aperture Fast shutter soeeds and larger apertures freeze moving objects and soften background details while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and bring out background details Shutter speed Aperture Control panel Slow shutter speed 1 s Small aperture f 36 Large aperture f 3 Remember the larger the f number the smaller the aperture 79 Mode P Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Rotate the mode dial to P 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot Flexible Program In mode P different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main c
109. We E E Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor 130 EE Highlights 3 Highlights NIKON D90 4 1 Protect status 139 3 Image highlights 163 5 Frame number 2 Retouch indicator 209 4 Camera name total number of images Blinking areas indicate highlights EE Shooting Data Page 1 3 MTR SPD AP 1 250 F11 4 EXP MODE ISO P 200 5 EA EXP TUNING 0 1 6 6 FOCAL LENGTH 35mm T LEN 18 105 3 5 5 6 l 8 AF VR A VR On i 9 FLASH MODE WZ Built in TTL 1 0 10 CMD M TTL 3 0 A TTL 3 0 B OFF C OFF 1 Protect status ss 139 5 Exposure 9 Flash MOde sess 71 2 Retouch indicator 209 compensation 90 Flash compensation 91 3 Metering sscsssescsssssssssssseees 87 Optimal exposure 10 Commander mode group Shutter speed 81 83 TUNING gt seesssssssseseeresessssss 178 name flash control APeIrtUre n esccessesseeees 82 83 6 Focal length 228 mode flash 4 Shooting Mode 34 41 78 7 Lens data compensation 185 ISO sensitivity 2 ou 74 8 Focus mode 54 59 11 Camera name Lens VR vibration 12 Frame number reduction 4 2
110. YZ I cursor nput OKOK f 107 108 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings or make independent adjustments to sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software and software created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system BE Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as described below e Select Nikon Picture Controls pg 109 Select an existing Nikon Picture Control e Modify existing Picture Controls pg 110 Modify an existing Picture Control to create a combination of sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue for a particular scene or effect e Create custom Picture Controls pg 113 Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired e Share custom Picture Controls pg 115 Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX supplied and other compatible software or s
111. a Auto z m A m NORM liu AUTO GIF sol N ancas GD ES Gl AS 3D tracking 11 Points When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background 173 a2 Center Focus Point This option available in all shooting modes determines the size of the center focus point Option Viewfinder display Description Normal zone Focus on stationary subjects that can be easily framed ie default in the focus point Focus on moving subjects Not available when Auto area is selected for Custom Setting a1 AF area mode t 3 Wide zone See page 54 for more information on focus settings a3 Built in AF assist Illuminator Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor This option is available in all shooting modes except ll and Option Description If the subject is poorly lit the AF assist illuminator will light to assist the focus operation in single servo AF AF S selected for autofocus mode or single servo AF ae t selected in AF A autofocus mode when Single point Auto area or 3D tracking 11 points is selected for Custom Setting a1 AF area mode or when Custom Setting a1 is set to Dynamic area and the center focus point is selected Off The AF assist illu
112. a a aAA A ATA AE A A A ET 264 Flas KEOMO aa A A A A AA A otis 265 Shutter Speeds Available with the Built in FlaSh ss ssssssesssesseessesseessesseeseessesssesseosssssess 265 Aperture Sensitivity ANd Flash Range s sssesssesssesssesssesssessseessessseesssesseesseeessesssessseessessss 266 SO SCIRICAtl OM SA aA EA eE AAE cates cre aa A NELE EL dTE Tem ena eee 267 227 Compatible Lenses CPU lenses particularly types G and D are recommended for use with the D90 CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring CPUlens Type G lens Type D lens Calculating Picture Angle The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 x 24 mm The size of the area exposed by the D90 in contrast is 23 6 x 15 8 mm meaning that the picture angle of a 35mm camera is approximately 1 5 times that of the D90 The approximate focal length of lenses for the D90 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 Picture size 35mm format 36 x 24mm Lens Picture diagonal Picture size D90 23 6 X 15 8mm Picture angle 35mm format Picture angle D90 Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens 228 Compatible CPU Lenses Cameraseting Fous Mode Metering
113. a a aver ree oN renee ees 214 Filter EOTS ae See erat ah leach aenace eae Beet toate colar actactti 215 Go 6 gt Balan spree renee ene nen Tt ee erence rs eEn oeaee rere enter Toe te eer 216 SVU VAS WL KE N EEE A AE E A edo Mute alate Meet T teeta 216 mage OV SI AY anneta a R 218 NEFRXRAWIPTOCESSIN O ueisiernni iaa e a E N 220 OWEK 5 2 0 U lal ai A E 221 BE AUN EI N E E cineca E A A AE A AA AE O 221 Bits ola dle aie le gy dye sien nn pe ries Smee reer n tr Pee etrr mre ore eetne 222 Fe UST YG E E 222 Side by Side CONAN ISON essevsscxsvsssseecesussondssnvsstevarozaaensbsestnseasesencesonndentsoncaneeteesapnsonsteey 223 El Recent Settings TH My MenU ccsessssssessssssssssesscssesscssessessecsscesessscsscesessecsecsssesesseess 224 E Recent Settings Viewing Recent Settings c scssssessessecsssssssscssessesesseeseeseeseessees 224 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu u csesssssssssssesssssessssssecssssssecsscsessseseesssscesesees 225 Technical Notes 227 ONIN aU SS NSS EEA E AE E N A EN A A A E 228 Co ompatple CPU LENSES crscscessceconsceasesesessucnsttanvnsyasvousastsetesneedsascesisenictaibouisniuteiierstensuniasdess 229 NOn PEON O e E E O hanna 230 Optional Flash Units Speedlights ssesesesseossesseessesssessesssesseesecsseesecoseeneesseosseoseossesss 233 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS s ssseesssesssesssseesseessseessessseeosseesseessseossee 233 ELE EE E A T E E A E E E teed ec ateceeeseeec 238 Other
114. alent to ISO 200 and ISO 3200 in steps equivalent to 3 EV For special situations ISO sensitivity can be lowered below ISO 200 by about 0 3 EV t 5 3 equivalent to ISO 160 0 7 EV t 5 1 equivalent to ISO 125 or 1 0 EV L if equivalent to ISO 100 or raised above ISO 3200 by about 0 3 EV H 5 3 equivalent to ISO 4000 0 7 EV H 3 7 equivalent to ISO 5000 or 1 0 EV H it equivalent to ISO 6400 Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option the default setting which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions ISO AUTO is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when AUTO is selected ISO sensitivity can be selected by pressing the amp ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted from the shooting menu pg 165 eT ISO ama ISO button Main command dial Control panel AUTO If the mode dial is rotated to P S A or M after ISO AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in another mode the ISO sensitivity last selected in P S A or M mode will be restored HI 0 3 HI 1 Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion See Also For information on enabling auto ISO sensitivity control in P S A or M modes see page 78 For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at hi
115. ame a photograph in the viewfinder with the main subject in at least one of the eleven focus points ISO aad Focus point Using a Zoom Lens Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a Zoom in larger area of the frame or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final photograph select longer focal lengths on the lens focal length scale index to zoom in shorter focal lengths to zoom out lt gt 700M ring Zoom out 37 Step 5 Focus 1 Press the shutter release button halfway Press the shutter release button halfway to focus The camera will select the focus points automatically If the subject is poorly lit the flash may pop up and the AF assist illuminator may light 2 Check the indicators in the viewfinder When the focus operation is complete the selected focus points will be briefly highlighted a beep will sound and the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder If the camera chooses single servo autofocus pg 54 focus will lock while the shutter release button is pressed halfway In focus Buffer indicator capacity Description Subject in focus Camera unable to focus using autofocus See page 55 In focus indicator blinks While the shutter release button is pressed halfway the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer pg 65 will be displayed in the viewfinder The Shutter Release Butto
116. an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached and turned on Custom Optional flash Setting e2 changes to Optional flash allowing the flash control mode for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and Manual Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available M Manual 185 Flash Control Mode The shooting information display shows the flash control mode for the built in flash Built in and for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe Optional as follows Auto aperture AA Manual a Ononi a Optional n 4 A Di eR TTL TTL TTL B q 2a 7 Auto FP pg 195 a a FP FP e Repeating flash RPT RPT JA JA Commander mode an CMD cw CMD ie 1 Available with SB 900 and SB 800 only 2 Flash control mode for built in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e2 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash pg 185 186 EE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 18 59 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F EE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a Flash cntrl for built in flash strobe light effect Press lt or gt to highlight the following pee A utpu Imes requency options A or VW to change nis of Us 2 15 1 50 Set OKOK Option Description Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choose the n
117. and GH continuous high speed modes 1 Select HiL or GH mode Press the B button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel button Main command dial Control panel 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is pressed all the way down pictures will be taken at up to 4 5 fps in continuous high speed mode or at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d6 CL mode shooting speed pg 182 in continuous low speed mode Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 21 pictures c Auto Image Rotation The camera orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all images in the same burst even if the camera is rotated during shooting See Auto Image Rotation pg 205 See Also For information on the number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see page 262 65 Self Timer Mode X The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits T Mount the camera ona tripod Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable level surface 2 Select mode Press the H button and rotate the main command dial
118. ansfer button to transfer photographs for more information on using Nikon Transfer select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu 6 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends Nikon Transfer will close automatically when transfer is complete 149 Printing Photographs JPEG photographs can be printed by any of the following methods e Connect the camera to a printer and print photographs directly from the camera see below e Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot see the printer manual for details If the printer supports DPOF pg 274 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 157 e Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center If the center supports DPOF pg 274 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 157 e Transfer pictures pg 148 and print them from a computer using ViewNX supplied pg 148 or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 240 NEF RAW photographs can only be printed using ViewNX or Capture NX 2 as described above or by printing JPEG copies created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu pg 220 To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection follow the steps below Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF pg 157 Connect camera to printer p
119. anty I User s Manual this guide I Quick Guide a guide for first time users describing the basic steps involved in such tasks taking pictures copying pictures to a computer and printing pictures _I Software Installation Guide _I Software Suite CD ROM I Registration card U S A only Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used v This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The SD logo is a trademark of the SD Card Association PictBridge and the SDHC logo are trademarks HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC Homi All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Introduction Basic Photography and Playback More on Photography All Modes P S A and M Modes B More on Playback Connections Ea The Playback Menu fe The Shooting Menu
120. aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit 7 Can be selected with camera 8 Select On for Custom Setting e5 Auto FP pg 195 LISESE TES TY N Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote SB 900 ee 900 SB 900 Y 235 236 HE Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock and no photographs can be taken Speedlight SB 80DX SB 28DX SB 28 SB 30 SB 27 SB 225 SB 23 SB 292 a mode ee 26 me 25 SB 24 a 50DX eS 22 SB 20 oat 16B SB 15 SB 21B2 SB 29S2 Non TTL auto i Manual Y ae 4 a o REAR Rearcurtainsne WW 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm Y Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D90 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals If an optional flash unit is attached with the camera in modes other than the flash will fire whenever a photograph is taken The following flash modes are available e Gd and amp modes Fill flash and red eye reduction Fill flash is a
121. ar in photo information display Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting Option Description On default Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting Off Pictures can only be displayed by pressing P button Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 128 Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically rotated for display in the On default camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation pg 205 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in wide landscape orientation Pictmotion Create and view slide shows with custom transitions and background music pg 141 163 Slide Show Play pictures back one at a time in a simple automated slide show pg 143 Print Set DPOF Choose Select set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF compatible device pg 157 Choose Deselect all to remove all pictures from the current print order 164 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options The shooting menu contains the options listed below To display the shooting menu
122. ata from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably superior to photographs combined in an imaging application Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting EE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s 1 Select Multiple exposure SHOOTING MENU Cy ISO sensitivity settings a j Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting 2 Long exp NR OFF menu and press gt 4 High ISO NR NORM E Active folder NcD90 Multiple exposure OFF EJ Movie settings 2 Select Number of shots Miitiple exposure O Highlight Number of shots and press gt Number of shots Auto gain 3 Select the number of shots Multiple exposure s Number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures two or three that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 4 Select Auto gain Multiple exposure Highlight Auto gain and press gt Done Number of shots Auto gain Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review pg 163 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay for image review using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 180 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 121 5 Set gain Multiple exposure Auto gain
123. ator is displayed If the flash ready indicator is not displayed the flash is charging remove your finger briefly from the shutter release button and try again To save battery power when the flash is not in use return it to its closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place For more information on using the flash see page 70 Creative Photography Scene Modes The camera offers a choice of five scene modes Selecting a program automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene making creative photography as easy as rotating the mode dial Mode Description Portrait For portraits Landscape For natural and man made landscapes in daylight or at night W Close up For close up shots of flowers insects and other small objects X Sports For moving subjects I Night portrait For portraits taken under low light To take photographs in scene modes 1 Select the desired mode Rotate the mode dial to select a scene mode 2 Take photographs Frame a photograph focus and shoot Portrait Use for portraits with soft natural looking skin tones If the subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth a Landscape Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight or at night The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off automatically Use of a trip
124. automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Replace battery in remote control 241 Choose remote control mode 68 Flash is charging 40 Time selected for Custom Setting c5 Remote on 180 duration has passed reselect remote control mode Bright light is interfering with remote Photos are blotched or e Clean lens smeared e Clean low pass filter 244 251 Randomly spaced bright pixels noise appear in photos AF assist illuminator does not light No photo taken when remote control shutter release button is pressed 252 Problem Menu item can not be f Some options are not available in all modes selected Shooting P S A M Problem Solution Page e Flash is charging 40 e Non CPU lens is attached rotate camera mode dial to M 83 e Mode dial rotated to after shutter speed of tint amp or 81 selected in mode M choose new shutter speed Flash in use If On is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto FP in modes P S A and M optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 195 and SB R200 flash units can be used at all shutter speeds colorare unnatural e Adjust white balance to match light source 95 j e Adjust Set Picture Control settings 108 A me Subject is too dark or too bright 102 balance Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D90 balance Shutter release disabled
125. ave edit Load save and press gt ee Load save 2 Select Delete from card Manage Picture Control Gy Load save Highlight Delete from card and press gt Copy to camera Delete from card gt Copy to card 3 Select a Pictu re Control Manage Picture Control Oo Delete from card Highlight a custom Picture Control slot1 TOZ NEUTRALES through 99 and either O MUUR CH Confirm e press to view current Picture Control MONOCHROME 02 Settings or A sharpening Contrast Brightness Filter effects Toning ra Cyanotype 4 o CH OK Done e press to display confirmation dialog shown Manage Picture Control at rig ht s Delete from card Delete Picture Control MONOCHROME 02 Yes No 4 Select Yes Manage Picture Control Delete from card Highlight Yes and press to delete the selected Delete Picture Control Picture Control WONOCHROWE 02 Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait and Landscape can not be renamed or deleted Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day To use Active D Lighting 1 Select matrix metering Matrix metering 3 pg 87 is recommended when using Active D Li
126. aximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO sensitivity of Mode 20 ww w PE Z k E 8 e e o un n w For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering 4 to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure 237 Flash Contacts The D90 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera EE The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera without a sync cable pg 234 The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin such as the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 Accessory shoe The AS 15 Accessory Shoe Adapter When the AS 15 accessory shoe adapter available separately is mounted on the camera accessory shoe flash
127. be restored the next time bracketing is activated See Also See page 264 for a list of bracketing programs For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 177 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e6 Bracketing order pg 195 93 94 Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter soeed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter soeed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode When On is selected for ISO sensitivity auto control pg 166 the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded In exposure bracketing shutter speed will only be changed after the camera has adjusted ISO sensitivity Exposure and Flash Bracketing In Sit and GH modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program Selecting auto or scene modes will cancel bracketing bracketing will resume when mode P S A or Mis selected Exposure and flash bracketing are cancelled when WB bracketing or ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 191 Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card
128. camera detects a portrait subject facing the camera if multiple faces up to a maximum of five are detected the camera will focus on the closest subject Manual focus Use the multi selector to choose the Focus point focus point for electronic rangefinding pg 59 as described for wide and normal area autofocus above 5 Focus Autofocus In wide and normal area autofocus the camera will focus while the shutter release button is pressed halfway In face priority autofocus the camera sets focus for the face in the double yellow border while the shutter a release button is pressed halfway if the camera can no longer detect the subject because for u example the subject has looked away borders will no longer be displayed The focus point will Wot blink green and the monitor may brighten or er Ext Oost amAuto 531 darken while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red Note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point blinks red and that single servo autofocus is used regardless of the option selected for autofocus mode pg 54 Check focus in the monitor before shooting 45 46 Manual focus Focus using the lens focusing ring 6 Take the picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take pictures in the current release mode pg
129. card will be displayed Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button 3 Display retouch options Press to display retouch options see the section for the selected option for details To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon Retouching Copies RETOUCH MENU e D Lighting Red eye correction Trim s Filter effects Color balance Small picture EJ Image overlay Monochrome Black and white FARASI i A DDD Zoom OKOK Black and white D 100NCD90 CSC_0013 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 14 08 4288x2848 Copies created with Trim or Small picture can not be further modified Quick retouch is not available with copies created with D lighting similarly D lighting is not available with copies created with Quick retouch D lighting red eye correction filter effects cross screen excepted quick retouch and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies With the exception of Cross screen filter effects can not be applied to copies created with filters other than Cross screen Image overlay can be applied multiple times Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies although multiple edits may result in loss of detail Image Quality Except in the case of
130. cautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not short or disassemble the battery e Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards e Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins e Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains e When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place e The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool e Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation ZN Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger e Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire e Do not handle the power cable
131. ctures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient Choose Disable where wireless devices are prohibited Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card The retouch menu is only available when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera To display the retouch menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the retouch menu tab for more information see page 19 Option See page Option See page E D Lighting 212 fh Image overlay 218 Red eye correction 212 NEF RAW processing 220 X Trim 213 C 4 Quick retouch 221 Monochrome 214 a Straighten 221 Q Filter effects 215 Distortion control 222 df Color balance 216 Fisheye 222 C Small picture 216 m O Side by side comparison 223 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control or JPEG copies of NEF RAW images created with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control cross screen filter effects can be applied to monochrome images 209 Creating Retouched Copies Except in the case of Image overlay pg 218 and Side by side comparison pg 223 the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full frame playback as well as from the retouch menu EE C
132. d f7 Reverse indicators Default 1 60 s TTL Off AE amp flash Off MTR gt under gt over LCD backlight 8 Select center focus point FV lock AE AF lock No Off On Release locked cia HEosHEsoo soslosol A E 261 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 2 GB Panasonic Pro HIGH SPEED card at different image quality and size settings Image quality Image size Filesize No of images Buffer capacity 2 som e o 7 NEF JPEG fine 7 7 ae 13 9 MB 106 7 JPEG normal 7 11 6 MB 124 7 7 ee 11 7 MB 123 7 7 NEF RAW OBM B 9 N Sz ome eGfine O M 34M 100 100 100 JPEG normal 1 7 MB 100 100 1 5 MB 100 JPEG basic 100 100 1 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer Drops if ISO sensitivity is set to nH u3 or higher High ISO NR is on when ISO sensitivity is set to 800 or higher or long exposure noise reduction is on 3 Image size applies to JPEG images only Size of NEF RAW images can not be changed File size is the total for NEF RAW and JPEG images Custom Setting d6 CL mode shooting speed pg 182 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 4 262 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the follow
133. d battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 18a quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 8 4 V 900 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Charging time Approx 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F eae Approx 90 x 35 x 58 mm 3 5 x 1 4 x 2 3 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding power cable EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 4V 1500 mAh ane Approx 39 5 x 56 x 21 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding terminal cover AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens Type G type AF S DX Zoom NIKKOR VR lens with built in CPU and Nikon bayonet mount Supported cameras Nikon digital SLR cameras DX format Focal length 18 105mm Maximum aperture f 3 5 5 6 Construction 15 elements in 11 groups including 1 ED glass element and 1 aspherical element Picture angle 76 15 20 Focal length scale mm 18 24 35 50 70 105 Distance information Output to camera Zoom control Zoom adjusted by rotating separate
134. ded with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in the U S A The Battery Charger e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U S A use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed This power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
135. e e The subject lacks contrast e The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness e Across star filter or other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point e The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the fi button are CED BS 125 F56 smAutolS37 Framing guides HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right 47 Basic Playback At default settings photographs are automatically displayed for about 4 s after shooting If no photograph is displayed in the monitor the most recent picture can be viewed by pressing the P button 1 Press the gt button A photograph will be displayed in the monitor gt button NSS 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 2 View additional pic
136. e and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark 60 Image Quality and Size Together image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on the memory card Larger higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more memory meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card Image Quality and Size Large file size JPEG fine T 5S D A 3 e gt 2 JPEG normal Ke S V as O JPEG basic Small file size S M L Small lt Image size gt Large Changes to image quality and size are reflected in the number of exposures remaining as displayed in the control panel and viewfinder pg 35 File Names Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form DSC_nnnn xxx where nnnn is a four digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by the camera and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions NEF for NEF images or JPG for JPEG images The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of NEF JPEG have the same file names but different extensions Small copies created with the small picture option in the retouch menu have file names beginning with SSC_ and ending with the extension JPG e g SSC_0001 JPG while images recorded with the other options in the retouch menu have file names beginning with CSC e g CSC_
137. e battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused 275 Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold Symbols 6 switch 196 a Auto mode 34 Auto flash off mode 34 Portrait 41 Landscape 41 cE Bi hv Close up 42 Sports 42 isi Night portrait 42 P Programmed auto 80 S Shutter priority auto 81 A Aperture priority auto 82 M Manual 83 flexible program 80 s Single frame 64 EiL Continuous low speed 64 65 182 LH Continuous high speed 64 65 Self timer 66 179 Remote control 68 Live view 43 K3 Matrix 87 e Center weighted 87 CJ Spot 87 4 flash ready indicator 9 40 FV lock 198 Bracketing indicator 92 191 193 w White balance 95 MEE White Balance Bracketing 191 PRE Preset manual 100 4 Exposure Compensation 90 Flash Compensation 91 Clock not set indicator 28 d Beep indicator 180 Numerics 3D color matrix metering II 87 3D tracking 173 420 segment RGB sensor 87 A AC adapter 239 Accessories 239 Active D Lighting 119 Active folder 169 adjustment control 32 AE L 88 AE L 200 AE L AF L button 88 AE L AF L button 200 AE L AF L for MB D80 176 AF 54 56 AF assist 38 174 231 AF point illum
138. e brightness of the light sources Cross screen affected Number of points Cross x e Filter angle Choose the angle of the points i a screen me e Length of points Choose the length of points yee e Confirm Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right Ko Press amp to preview the copy full frame a p Eene GdZoom WOK e Save Create a retouched copy 215 216 Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms pg 130 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Increase amount of green AA Create retouched copy Increase amount of blue q a Increase amount of amber mea amount 4 magenta Zoom To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor press the amp button The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the image displayed in the monitor While the image is zoomed in press the Yo button to toggle playback zoom and zoom and scroll the image as described on page 138 Small Picture Create a small copy of the selected picture The following sizes are available Option Description 640x480 Suited to television playback 320x240 Suited to display on Web pages 160x120 Suitable for e mail The small picture option can be used during full frame playback as described on page 210 The procedure for selecting pictures after choosi
139. e camera may record the sound made by VR lenses when vibration reduction is on 51 BE Viewing Movies Movies are indicated by a icon in full frame playback pg 128 The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed Movie Time indicator A remaining 100NCD90 DSC_0013 AVI Audio 15 09 2008 11 04 49 an To Ue Description Start pause P Press to start pause or resume playback resume Advance Press lt or P to rewind or fast forward While playback is rewind paused press lt or gt to rewind or advance one frame Adjust volume R Qa Press to increase volume 9 to decrease Exit to shooting y mode a Display menus MENU See page 159 for more information amp lt gt Press the selector up or press gt to exit to full frame playback V Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately Return to full frame playback 52 More on Photography All Modes This and the following two chapters build on the Tutorial to cover more advanced shooting and playback options TOLEN E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 54 AMOO CUS a A a a E E A A EA A A E tetas ane E eneeaee steak 54 FOCUS PONT SEEC NA aea a A A A malemiatnomtuuantin 56 FOCUS LOCK a A ERE NE a O A A A A E 57 Manual FOCUS aarre AA E E AA A E A A assesment aeat 59 image Quality and SIZE kasoe snr Etar E EI ESAIAS OSE ETATO SE RETTA ITS 61 Image al YE E A A A A E A 62 MAREE EE 7A E E onsen
140. e display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter pp 244 246 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored but this has no affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If you are using an AC adapter unplug the adapter to prevent fire Ifthe product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera ina plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent
141. e local authorities in charge of waste management Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices xvii Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibi
142. e used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed 129 163 62 162 163 205 84 128 205 139 162 35 150 203 147 240 206 253 254 Miscellaneous Problem Page Date of recording is not TEE TNE EN 57 correct Some options are not available at certain combinations of Menu item can not be settings or when no memory card is inserted Note that gt 08 selected Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional AC adapter Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator o E Lens aperture ring is not set to a ring to m aperture oe ae battery e Battery exhausted e Recharge or replace battery e Battery can not be used e Use Nikon approved battery or contact Nikon authorized service representative Ca a je An extremely exhausted Replace the battery or xviii blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery recharge the battery ifthe 22 23 or a third party battery is rechargeable Li ion battery inserted either in the camera is exhausted or in the optional MB D80 battery pack LOCK K Camera clock is not set Set camera clock blinks a i e No lens attached e Attach non IX Nikkor lens le SO ema blinks autofocus Use a lower ISO sensitivity 74 Use optional ND filter 240 Subject too bright photo will In exposure mode be
143. easing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock and confirm that the EM icon is no longer displayed in viewfinder V Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash When the built in flash is used alone FV lock is only available if TTL the default setting is selected for Custom Setting e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 185 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units In addition to the built in flash FV lock is available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units available separately Set the optional flash to TTL mode the SB 900 and SB 800 can also be used in AA mode see the flash manual for details While FV lock is in effect flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 185 FV lock can be used with remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units if a any of the built in flash flash group A or flash group B is in TTL mode or b a flash group is composed entirely of SB 900 and SB 800 flash units in TTL or AA mode 199 f4 Assign AE L AF L Button Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button This option is available in all shooting modes Option Description ey AE AF lock default W AElockonly Exposure locks while the AE L AF L button is pressed fa AFlockonly Focus locks while the AE L AF L button is pressed Exposure locks when
144. ecording or playback e Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card e Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects e Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks e Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card e Do not expose to water heat high levels of humidity or direct sunlight No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the control panel and viewfinder will show and an icon will appear in the viewfinder as shown at right If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL3e battery and no memory card inserted will be displayed in the control panel pE TE and an icon will be displayed in the viewfinder The Write Protect Switch Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent accidental loss of data When this switch is in the lock position photos can not be recorded or deleted and Write protect switch the memory card can not be formatted To unlock the memory card slide the switch to the write position See Also See page 202 for information on formatting memory cards using the Forma
145. ect Autofocus mode 54 How do I choose where the camera focuses Focus point 56 Can change the composition after focusing Focus lock 57 Can create a multiple exposure Multiple exposure 121 How do l improve image quality How do take bigger photographs magsauli 62 63 How can I get more photos on the memory card Can take photos at a reduced size for e mail Viewing and Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase See page Can view my photographs on the camera Camera playback 48 128 Can view more information about photos Photo info 129 How do I get rid of an unwanted photo Deleting individual photos T Can I delete several photos at once Delete 162 Can zoom in on pictures to make sure they re in Playback zoom 138 focus Can protect photos from accidental deletion Protect 139 Is there an automatic playback slide show Pictmotion 141 option Slide show 143 Can view my photos on TV Television playback 146 Can view my photos in High Definition HDMI 147 How do I copy photos to my computer Connecting to a computer 148 How do print photographs Printing photographs 150 Can print photos without a computer Printing via USB 151 Can print the date on my photographs Time stamp DPOF How do order professional prints Print set DPOF 157 How do I bring out details in shadows D Lighting 212 Can get rid of red eye
146. ected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 available separately pg 240 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications Y Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced 247 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building ona cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fi
147. ed by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button 269 Flash Built in flash a IZ Auto flash with auto pop up P S A M Manual pop up with button release Guide Number m ft AtISO 200 Approx 17 56 18 59 with manual flash at 20 C 68 F e AtISO 100 Approx 12 39 13 43 with manual flash Flash control e TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using 420 segment RGB sensor are available with built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 e Auto aperture Available with SB 900 SB 800 and CPU lens e Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 900 SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22s e Range priority manual Available with SB 900 and SB 800 Flash mode e O Auto auto with red eye reduction fill flash and red eye reduction available with optional flash units e X Auto slow sync auto slow sync with red eye reduction slow sync and slow sync with red eye reduction available with optional flash units e lal Fill flash and red eye reduction available with optional flash units e PA Fill flash rear curtain with slow sync auto slow sync slow sync with red eye reduction red eye reduction e S M Fill flash rear curtain sync red eye reduction Flash compensation 3 1 EV in increments of 3 or 1 2 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when built in flash or optional flash unit such as SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28Dx or SB
148. eer mne ert 62 MANENE RS EE E A E E EI E EEE A A N T T A 63 Release MOTO nangin AAE ee ee ee 64 Continuous MOU psc csceseasat asescesusesasceacsaners ces ociisu avwtasevos tava toeasaes wnessetoes eoranniaearae reese 65 Self Timer Mode H sassvscsasciiscesaopssanvansenestvonssivivicoenersivseioutisecssnousonimeaeeraameatioonenniivnnsinine 66 Using an Optional Remote Control 8 sessoosesssoesossssoesssseesesnssecosssseeesnsseeronssserossseeee 68 Uang NEBUN IES i E E NEE 70 FASA MOOG aaa E O danas tadareonnctaes 71 DEEE L A mete ae A E N OA A A ere arn 74 TWO BUOM INS O aossen aein carers eased a AEAEE ee 75 P S A and M Modes 77 Shutter Speed and ApertUre ssesssesseessesseessesssesseesscssceseessessesseesseeseesscossrsseossesseeseeoseeseess 78 Mode P Programmed Auto ccccsccsssessssssscsssssscsesecsssesscsssecscsesecassecsssescsssecscsescassecsenees 80 Mode S Shutter Priority Auto sesessseessseesssessseessseesseeseeosseeosseesseronseosseeossersseeoseeossseessee 81 Mode A Aperture Priority AUtO sse ssseesssessseessseesseesssessssessseeosseesseesneeosserosseesseessseesse 82 Mode M Mantal essri a A 83 EKOO SUING a E E A T S 87 Metena A E E E 87 Autoexposure Lock P S and A Modes Only s ssssessseesssessseessseesseessessseeosserosseesseess 88 Exposure Compensation esesessessesseesessessesroseesesseosessessesroseosesseoseoseseesreseosesseoseoresersresreseeses 90 Flash Compensation
149. ees 10 12 DOCE pmeeecee enters enetn aterrir rey me teerneerrys 135 ISO ISO sensitivity DUTTON cesses 74 The Mode Dial The camera offers a choice of the following eleven shooting modes HEP S A and M Modes Select these modes for full control over camera settings P Programmed auto pg 80 Camera A Aperture priority auto pg 82 Adjust chooses shutter speed and aperture user aperture to soften background details or controls other settings increase depth of field to bring both main S Shutter priority auto pg 81 Choose fast subject and background into focus shutter speeds to freeze action slow shutter M Manual pg 83 Match shutter speed speeds to suggest motion by blurring and aperture to your creative intent moving objects EE Auto Modes Select these modes for simple point and shoot photography or Auto pg 34 Camera adjusts settings automati cally to produce optimal results with point and shoot simplicity Recommended for first time users of digital cameras Auto flash off pg 34 As above except that the flash will not fire even when lighting is poor EE Scene Modes Selecting a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene making creative photography as simple as rotating the mode dial Z Portrait pg 41 Shoot portraits with back amp Sports pg 42 Freeze motion for dynamic ground in soft focus sports shots Landscape pg
150. efore the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected To reduce blur when using a tripod choose On for Custom Setting d10 Exposure delay mode Exposure Lock and Exposure Compensation Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button pg 88 or in P S A and M modes altered using exposure compensation pg 90 The effects of exposure compensation are visible in the monitor during live view Y Face Priority AF The camera s ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors including whether or not the subject is facing the camera The camera may be unable to detect subjects that are not facing the camera or faces that are hidden by sunglasses or other obstructions or that take up too much or too little of the frame If no face is detected when the shutter release button is pressed halfway the camera will focus on the subject in the center of the frame The camera will continue to focus until a face is detected or the shutter release button is er pressed halfway If a flashing double red border is displayed the camera is unable to focus i recompose the picture and try again V Using Autofocus in Live View Autofocus is slower in live view The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations e The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the fram
151. elds Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and th
152. ending on memory card write speed shooting may end before this length is reached 7 Recording Movies Banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images when the camera is panned Jagged edges false colors moir and bright spots may also appear When recording movies avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view can be used to record movies for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise and unusual colors the camera may also become sie N noticeably warm but this does not indicated a malfunction To oe prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits recording will end m eS 6 Sfutol53N automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected Autofocus is not available when recording movies Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected Th
153. epiece 32 66 eyepiece cap 17 66 focus 32 59 Viewfinder grid display 181 Viewfinder warning display 181 ViewNX 148 W WB 95 191 White balance 95 191 bracketing 191 preset manual 95 White balance 95 Auto 95 Choose color temp 95 99 Cloudy 95 Direct sunlight 95 Flash 95 Fluorescent 95 Incandescent 95 Preset manual 95 100 Shade 95 World time 27 204 Date and time 27 204 Date format 28 204 Daylight saving time 27 204 Time zone 27 204 Q Speedlight 233 Quick retouch 221 Spot 87 Quick Settings Display 12 Straighten 221 R T Rear curtain sync 71 Television 146 Recent settings 224 Thumbnail 135 Red eye correction 212 Timer 66 Red eye reduction 71 Trim 213 Turn 27 Release mode 64 continuous 64 65 high speed 64 65 U low speed 64 65 182 USB 149 151 Two button reset 75 278 No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION CE NIKON CORPORATION AMA12890 Printed in Europe SB2L06 11 2008 Nikon Corporation 6MB03011 06
154. era is unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus pg 59 EE Autofocus Mode The following autofocus modes are available when the focus mode selector is set to AF Autofocus mode Description Camera automatically selects single servo autofocus when subject is stationary continuous servo autofocus when subject is moving Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus For stationary subjects Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway Shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed For moving subjects Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button is pressed halfway Photographs can be taken even when in focus indicator is not displayed Auto select id default setting AF S Single servo AF AF C Continuous servo AF Press the AF button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel AF button Main command dial Control panel 54 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases rotate the focus mode selector to M and use manual focus pg 59 or use focus lock pg 57 to focus on anot
155. ere is room for 1 260 exposures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K Auto Meter Off At default settings the viewfinder and the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder pg 38 TA El 4 Jaro EJ gt m Cpe pyg y 630 NORM NNT A Exposure meterson Exposure meters off Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 179 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted number of exposures remaining will be displayed CER 35 36 Step 2 Choose Shooting and Focus Modes 1 Select or mode To take photographs without the flash rotate the mode dial to Otherwise rotate the mode dial to a 2 Select autofocus Rotate the focus mode selector to AF autofocus A Step 3 Check Camera Settings Check settings in the control panel The default settings for below AUTO a and amp mode are listed Iso auToO Oe al at f Option Default Description Page Flash mode If the subject is poorly lit the flash will pop up 8 mode AUTO automatically when
156. ersal Time or UTC in hours and press 6 4 Turn daylight saving time on or off World time Daylight saving time Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 6 5 Set the date and time World time Date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or gt to select an item A or W to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time 200R 0E OKOK 27 28 6 Choose a date format World time Date format Press A or W to choose the order in which the year Y M D Year Month Day month and day will be displayed and press 9 Woy MERE iN Day Month Year 7 Exit to shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway to exit to shooting mode The Setup Menu Language and date time settings can be changed at any time using the Language pg 204 and World time pg 204 options in the setup menu The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter pg 239 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date
157. ersion 2 0 167 274 Default settings 75 172 260 restoring 75 172 Delete 49 140 162 all images 162 current image 49 140 selected images 162 Delete 162 All 162 Select date 162 Selected 162 Depth of field 82 Depth of field preview button 82 191 Digital Print Order Format 150 153 157 274 Diopter 32 239 Display mode 163 Distortion control 222 D Lighting 212 DPOF 150 153 157 274 Dynamic area 56 173 E Easy exposure compensation 177 Electronic analog exposure display 84 EV steps for exposure cntrl 177 Exif version 2 21 167 274 Exposure 79 88 90 lock 88 meters 178 mode 78 aperture priority auto 82 manual 83 programmed auto 80 shutter priority auto 81 program 263 Exposure bracketing 92 191 195 Exposure compensation 90 177 Exposure delay mode 183 F File information 129 File number sequence 182 Filter effects 215 Blue intensifier 215 Cross screen 215 Green intensifier 215 Red intensifier 215 Skylight 215 Warm filter 215 Fine tune optimal exposure 178 Firmware version 208 Fisheye 222 Flash 40 70 71 233 bracketing 92 compensation 91 control 233 265 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 265 standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 265 mode 71 185 modeling 191 monitor pre flash 233 range 266 ready indicator 198 237 sync speed 185 sync terminal 238 Flash cntrl for built in flash 185 Commander mode 188 Manual 187 Repeating flash 1
158. erture of f 5 6 or faster 7 Attach in vertical orientation can be used in horizontal orientation once attached V Compatible Non CPU Lenses The lenses listed above may only be used when the camera is in mode M Selecting another mode disables the shutter release Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring and the camera autofocus system metering electronic analog exposure display depth of field preview and i TTL flash control can not be used Y Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D90 e TC 16AS AF teleconverter e Non Al lenses e Lenses that require the AU 1 focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 e Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 e 2 1cm f 4 e Extension Ring K2 e 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers 174041 174180 e 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial numbers 174031 174127 e 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 e AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm f 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED AF Teleconverter TC 16 e PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 or earlier e PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 851001 906200 e PC 35mm f 3 5 old type e Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type e Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 142361 143000 e Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers 200111 200310 7 Red Eye Reduction Lenses that block the subject s view of the AF assist illuminator may interfere with red eye reduction
159. es only Movie setting Choose a frame size and sound options for movies pg 50 This option is available in all modes HE Quality Choose a frame size Option Description Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps Each frame is 1280 x 720 pixels in size Choose for higher quality sa 040x424 3 2 Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps Each frame is 640 x 424 default pixels in size Record movies at a frame rate of 24 fps Each frame is 320 x 216 pixels in size Choose for reduced file size 0 1280x720 16 9 ua nw N 0o 320x216 3 2 EE Sound Choose On the default setting to record monaural sound with movies Off to record silent movies 170 G Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Custom Settings are used to customize camera Custom Setting groups settings to suit individual preferences To display a the Custom Settings menu press MENU and press lt I to highlight the tab for current menu then press A Foci AEE OFF or W to highlight the Custom Settings tab for CARER bd b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 _ more information see page 19 b Metering exposure 13 b2 Easy exposure compensation OFF H b3 Center weighted area QE Main menu b4 Fine tune optimal exposure c1 Shutter release button AEL OFF c2 Auto meter off delay 6s c3 Self timer a c4 Monitor off delay a f RiReset custom settinas ES Autofocus FF c Auto meter off delay 6s b Metering exposure tent ay
160. es or calendar playback with playback zoom movie playback Pictmotion slide show histogram display highlights auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Hi Speed USB Can be selected from NTSC and PAL images can be displayed on external device while camera monitor is on HDMI Mini connector Type C camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Remote cord MC DC2 available separately GPS unit GP 1 available separately Chinese Simplified and Traditional Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish 271 272 Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL3e battery Battery pack Optional MB D80 multi power battery pack with one or two rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e batteries or six AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries AA batteries available separately optional MS D200 battery holder is required when using AA batteries AC adapter EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions WxHxD Approx 132 x 103 x 77 mm 5 2 x 4 1 x 3 0 in Weight Approx 620 g 1 Ib 6 oz without battery memory card body cap or monitor cover Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charge
161. essesssesseessesseessense e Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range sssessssessssessssessserssseessseessseessseossseosseeosseeesseesssee Available Settings and Defaults The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode soaa x Slee sya setPicureContol i Whitebalnce S i y SSO sensitviysettins WWW v v v viv vv Active D Lighting AKA f Multipleexposurey E Metering S AAA Flexible program Pf fF PM Autoexposure lock Exposurecompensation o v Bracketing a ee ee ARAR Flashmode A WWII A FlashCompensationy i i i vv pa2Centerfocuspoint v v v v VO a3 Builtin AFassistiluminator V V V vvv vv las Focuspointwaparond V V V V v vvv vv a6 AE L AF L for MB D80 p s 19470 spul Huljjas wozsn NN NNN NNNSNN NASNNNNN Z NNN NN SNNN NNS 1 9S WO SN sbu AUN GOE ESOC b2 Easyexposurecompenrsaion 0 o vvv b3 Centerweigtedarea a l y ditFlshwaming O s eliFlashshutterspeed i e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash COT O TL MY oh eiModelingfsh a et Autobracketingset SSS i ear SS eGiBracketingorder i i y Reset with two button reset pg 75 Reset with when mode dial is rotated to new setting Available with optional flash units only Reset with Custom Setting R Reset Custom Settings VSN NESSES NSN N NNNUNN NNNUNN UNN NA S 259 The following defaults are restored with Custom Setting R Reset Custom Settings the following table lists the de
162. esstessvesssssvecstdessnsntescosssccvenes 62 Deleting pictures EO ENEE EEEE ES 49 Image GIO COR EE EEA P 63 Deleting pictures during playback 140 10 Diopter adjustment control essen 32 BA format DUTTON c sssessesessecseeseesseecescsees 30 11 AE L AF L button Monitor FOCUS OC ose arrestee cee eee eeee 57 Live CW sssssssssssessscssessssssssesesseresesssssessseeeree 43 Choosing rOle sssssssssesesssssssssssseseesessssssssses 200 Viewing pictures sesessssessseesseessseessersssesssees 50 12 live view button Full frame playback ccesssssssssesseseeneees 128 Taking photographs s ssseessseesseesseeesssesssee 43 gt playback button ssssesssseeesssesss 50 128 Shooting MOVIES sssesssssessssesesssessssseesssseesssee 50 MENU menu DUttON cccececsessesesseees 19 159 13 Multi selector eseseesssseesssseessserosssecossseessseees 19 Yon help protect button ssss 21 139 14 OK button esesssesssssssceersessssssssssseeesessssss 19 WB white balance button 15 Memory card slot COVef ssssesssseessssersssserss 29 WILE DalaNG 5 ssassanionacsanvisvissesavidentnoonveannennset 95 16 Focus Selector lOCK cccssesssssssesssessseesseesneeess 56 Fine tuning White balance 97 17 Memory card access lamp PESOS E 29 39 Color temperature sausen 99 18 M information display quick settings QEF thumbnail playback zoom out display button eesseessssssssssssssssssseees
163. ettings Fine Tuning Camera SettingS sessessesseeessssscessesseesssseeessseeees 171 R Res t GUIS CO fan Seting S aiseanna a a 172 FAVO US a a TN 173 ak Pal Ca Modene ae O O N 173 a2 Center Focus POIN siiaarnntun anes eat E E E ane 174 a3 Built in AF assist Illuminator sssesessesssseossesoseessseoseneosscosseessneossneossersseeosseessse 174 A4 AF Point iluminati M aeaee RAAE 175 ad FOCUS Point Wrap Around xisccscsiscticcssstnsdecesescssasueueasecesecsspestees nana 175 a6 AE L AF L for MB D80 s seseeesssesssseesssseesssseesssecesseerosseeossseessseeesseeeosseeossserssssersssee 176 a7 Live View AUTOFOCUS annin T N 176 D Meternng EXPO SUN iiaa E O E 177 D1 EV Steps TOP EXposure CIN acid teicionivceceshivest te lssteacteik teastivwtaevineebicmielaieenoe 177 b2 Easy EXpOsure COMPENSATION csecsssssecsssecscsssecsssesscsssecsssecscsesscsesecscsesscssseees 177 b3 Center Weighted Area csscssscsssssscscscsssssscscsscssasseccsscssassecassscsassscacseessasences 178 b4 Fine Tune Optimal ExPOSUre cccscsssssssscscsesscscsesssscscscsesessessssseseeesesssseseseeeeees 178 Cy TSS LOCI aoe a sasansceaesvatear oe asneene aan esanap estes 179 C1 Shutter Release Button AE L ou csesessssessssesscsesessssecscsesecsssececsecessescsesecseneescess 179 C2 AUTO Meter off Delay anrr R ENEA 179 a Tes Cal E E EE TAE EEEE 179 cA Monitoron DCI AY aian E A EOE 180 C5 Remoteon DURATION tees eens O EA 180 GE SHOOUN
164. faults for P S A and M modes For a list of the settings restored with a two button reset see page 172 Option al AF area mode a2 Center focus point Default Auto area Normal zone a3 Built in AF assist illuminator On a4 AF point illumination Auto a5 Focus point wrap around No wrap a6 AE L AF L for MB D80 AE AF lock a7 Live view autofocus Wide area b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 step b2 Easy exposure compensation Off b3 Center weighted area d 8 mm b4 Fine tune optimal exposure No c1 Shutter release button AE L Off c2 Auto meter off delay 6s c3 Self timer Self timer delay 10s Number of shots 1 c4 Monitor off delay Playback 10s 205 Shooting info display 10s T c5 Remote on duration d1 Beep d2 Viewfinder grid display d3 ISO display and adjustment d4 Viewfinder warning display d5 Screen tips d6 CL mode shooting speed d7 File number sequence d8 Shooting info display d9 LCD illumination d10 Exposure delay mode d11 Flash warning d12 MB D80 battery type 1min On Off Show frame count On On 3 fps Off Auto Off Off On LR6 AA alkaline Option e1 Flash shutter soeed e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash e3 Modeling flash e4 Auto bracketing set e5 Auto FP e6 Bracketing order f1 8 switch f2 OK button shooting mode f3 Assign FUNC button f4 Assign AE L AF L button f5 Customize command dials Change main sub Menus and playback f6 No memory car
165. ff scene modes portrait landscape amp close up sports is night portrait programmed auto with flexible program P shutter priority auto S aperture priority auto A manual M 5 5 EV in increments of 1 3 or 1 2 EV 2 or 3 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 or 2 EV 2 or 3 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 or 2 EV 2 or 3 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 2 frames Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button Exposure ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index Active D Lighting Focus Autofocus Detection range Lens servo Focus point AF area mode Focus lock ISO 200 3200 in steps of 3 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 100 equivalent below ISO 200 or to approx 0 3 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 6400 equivalent above ISO 3200 Can be selected from Auto Extra high High Normal Low or Off Nikon Multi CAM 1000 autofocus module with TTL phase detection 11 focus points including one cross type sensor and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F e Autofocus AF Instant single servo AF AF S continuous servo AF AF C auto AF S AF C selection AF A predictive focus tracking activated automatically according to subject status e Manual M Electronic rangefinder can be used Can be selected from 11 focus points Single point dynamic area auto area 3D tracking 11 points Focus can be lock
166. focus point at the left edge of the display The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that for No wrap i example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected default has no effect Wrap 175 a6 AE L AF L for MB D80 Choose the function assigned to the AE L AF L button on the optional MB D80 battery pack This option is available in all shooting modes Option Description AE AF lock default M AE lock only Exposure locks while the MB D80 AE L AF L button is pressed fa AF lock only Focus locks while the MB D80 AE L AF L button is pressed Exposure locks when the MB D80 AE L AF L button is pressed and Focus and exposure lock while the MB D80 AE L AF L button is pressed i a remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off AF ON Pressing the MB D80 AE L AF L button initiates autofocus Flash value for the built in flash and optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units locks when the MB D80 AE L AF L FV lock button is pressed pg 198 and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off Focus point The focus point pg 56 can be selected by pressing the MB D80 AE L selection AF L button and rotating the sub command dial Pressing gt when these options are highlighted displays a Focus point selection sub menu If On is selected
167. g 151 Print photographs Print multiple one ata time photographs pg 151 pg 153 Create index prints pg 156 Disconnect USB cable Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection in P S A and M modes set Color space to sRGB pg 167 150 HE Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the printer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard EJ 3 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display PictBridge l 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 74 08 4288x2848 EE Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or gt to view additional pictures or press A or W to view photo information pg 129 Press the amp button to zoom in on the 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORM current frame pg 138 press P to exit zoom 15 09 2008 10 74 08 428532048 To view six pictures at a time press the Qa button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press to dis
168. ge White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial Hil The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance option White balance Select White balance in the shooting menu pg 165 then highlight a white balance option and ae press gt If an option other than Fluorescent rt Choose color temp or Preset manual is gJ E Choose color temp selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press gt If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 106 before proceeding 2 Fine tune white balance Wite baane A Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with Coordinates each increment equivalent to about 5 mired Adjustment The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue lt 4 Increase amber White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as incandescent is
169. ge comment INGICATOL eseseseeseeees 205 Flash MOdEe cceseceseeees 71 Flash compensation 91 Exposure compensation brightness vertical axis nennir 90 shows number of pixels 43 Metering i1 87 ofeach brightness i BA Mode s a 34 41 78 mage oo 15 Shutter speed 81 83 ee a ai 16 Aperture 82 83 7 Focal length 228 8 GPS data indicator 124 23 22 ot 20 23 Date of recording 27 25 White balance 0 95 24 Folder name uu 162 Color temperature 99 White balance fine tuning esececseeseees 97 Preset manual 100 26 Color SPacCe eeeeseees 167 Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four nine or 72 images press the 9 button SRN Full frame Thumbnail Calendar playback playback playback To Ue Description Display mor I aA Press 9H button to increase the number of images displayed Q Dieolartewer Press amp button to reduce the number of images displayed ied ae Q When four images are displayed press to view highlighted g image full frame A Use multi selector or command dials to highlight images for SOE ida full frame playback playback zoom pg 138 or deletion pg a e ai 140 Use main command dial to move cursor left or right y sub command dial to move cursor up or down View do ae Press to display the highlighted image full frame Delete highlighted See page 140 for
170. gh ISO sensitivities see page 165 Two Button Reset The camera settings listed below can be restored to default 4 button values by holding the 4 and AF buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset Custom Settings are not affected AF button Option Default Option Default a Image quality pg 62 JPEG normal Focus point pg 56 Center Image size pg 63 L Metering pg 87 Matrix Release mode pg 64 Single frame AE AF lock hold pp 88 200 Off ISO sensitivity pg 74 Flexible program pg 80 Off AUTO Exposure compensation Off 200 pg 90 White balance pg 95 Auto Flash compensation pg 91 Off Fine tuning pg 97 0 Bracketing pg 92 Off 2 Color temperature pg 99 5000 K FV lock pg 198 Off Picture Control modifications Sane Flash mode pg 71 pg 110 Auto front Autofocus mode pg 54 AF A curtain sync Autofocus mode live view Auto slow Face priority sync D a x P S A M Wide area Front curtain e nomda sync Multiple exposure pg 121 Off 1 Focus point not displayed if Auto area is selected for Custom Setting a1 AF area mode 2 Number of shots reset to zero Bracketing increment reset to 1 EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing Default Settings See pages 258 261 for a list of default settings 75 76 P S A and M Modes P S
171. ghting 2 Select Active D Lighting SHOOTING MENU Set Picture Control J Manage Picture Control Inthe shooting menu pg 165 highlight Active reena Image size D lighting and press gt E ISO sensitivity settings Active D Lighting EJ Color space 3 Choose an option Active D Lighting Highlight Auto Extra high High Normal Low TPES or Off and press Choose Auto to let the ar FAL Low camera adjust D Lighting automatically according to shooting conditions 119 V Active D Lighting The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 111 can not be adjusted while active D Lighting is in effect In exposure mode M an Active D Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal Active D Lighting Versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting ADL Bracketing When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 191 the camera will automatically vary Active D Lighting over two photographs the first will be taken with Active D Lighting off the second with the current setting for Active D Lighting See page 193 for more information 120 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to three exposures in a single photograph using RAW d
172. ground lighting at night or under low light Use to include background lighting in portraits REAR rear curtain sync Flash fires just before shutter closes see below If this icon is not displayed flash will fire immediately after shutter opens Rear Curtain Sync Normally the flash fires as the shutter opens front curtain sync see below at left In rear curtain sync the flash fires just before the shutter closes creating the effect of a stream of light behind moving subjects ait Front curtain sync Rear curtain sync 71 The flash modes available depend on the mode currently selected with the mode dial D 2 8 is Auto Auto Slow sync 5 5 aut ABe Auto Auto d eye Off Off ed red 4 Cy CF red eye reduction SLOW reduction PA S M Fill flash Fill flash s s Red eye nea curtain reduction 3 5 slow sync Red eye Rear REAR e 5 L 5 S reduction curtain ow sync d eye Slow sync aoe eee red eel y reduction SLON Siow SLOW is displayed after button is released 72 BE Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place The Built in Flash Use with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18 300 mm or non CPU lenses with focal lengths of 18 200 mm pg 232 note that auto flash level control is available with CPU lenses only Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows Lenses that block
173. h Units The D90 can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below Feature ce SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 2 cuiden 5010 sami f 38125 308 2169 10733 oxo a857 sama anses 30 98 14 Auto power zoom mm Widepanel mm 121417 1417 A 60 down toward 90 up 180 left 90 up lens light axis 90 right 45 up away from light axis If a color filter is attached to the SB 900 when AUTO or 4 flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 900 SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 3 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 900 with standard illumination 4 27mm zoom coverage 5 24mm zoom coverage 7 down 90 up 180 left 90 right Head rotation ee UD 180 left right SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Y Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units Negative voltages or voltages over
174. he case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as battery level drops The shooting information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D80 as follows MB D80 battery type display Battery type EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery E AA batteries OOF SoM N Ewo GD ETM 6 A 184 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Shutter Speed This option available only in P and A modes determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in modes P and A regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes and M or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s the default setting to 30 s 30s e2 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash Choose the flash mode for the built in flash This option is available in P S A and M modes only Option Description TIL Meter Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions M4 Manual Choose the flash level pg 187 Repeating The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a strobe flash light effect pg 187 Commander Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote mode optional flash units pg 188 RPT CF Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When
175. he highlighted picture full frame press and hold the amp button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or F to view the other source image If multiple copies exist for the current source image press A or F to view the other copies To exit to playback mode press the gt button or press to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed Y Side by Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since been deleted or is currently protected pg 139 or hidden pg 162 Source Retouched image copy 223 Recent Settings My Menu The camera offers a choice of two custom menus a recent settings menu consisting of the twenty most recently used settings added to the top of the menu in the order they are used and My Menu a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus To display the custom menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the custom menu tab for more information see page 19 EE Choose Tab Choosing a Custom Menu Both the recent settings menu and My Menu contain a Choose tab option for choosing the menu displayed To switch back and forth between the recent settings menu and My Menu follow the steps below 1 Select Choose tab Pa In the RECENT SETTINGS menu or MY B onesta MENU highlight C
176. he photograph Highlight EXE and press to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph To exit without copying the photograph press the MENU button rll Sie 101NCD90_ CSC_0013 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 16 46 44 4288x2848 Quick Retouch Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast D lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects Press A or V to choose the amount of enhancement The effect Quick retouch can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph Cancel Zoom OWSave Straighten Create a straightened copy of the selected image Press to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0 25 degrees q to rotate it counterclockwise note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy 221 222 Distortion Control Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector or select Manual to reduce distortion manually Press to reduce barrel distortion lt to reduce pin cushion distortion note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy V Auto Auto is for
177. he specified Cancel number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures has been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e Atwo button reset is performed pg 75 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view pg 43 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted changes can not be made to bracketing or to shooting menu options other than White balance and the Lock mirror up for cleaning and Image Dust Off ref photo options in the setup menu can not used 123 124 The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 GPS unit available separately can be connected to the camera s accessory terminal as shown below using the cable supplied with the GP 1 allowing information on the camera s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken Turn the camera off before connecting the GP 1 for
178. her subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast The focus point contains between the subject and the oe areas of sharply contrasting background brightness Example Subject is the same Example Subject is half in color as the background the shade The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example Subject is inside a cage Background objects appear _ larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject LN The subject contains many lt fine details Example A field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness The subject is dominated by aan regular geometric patterns ia To Example Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper The AF Assist Illuminator If the subject is poorly lit the AF assist illuminator will light AF assist illuminator automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutter release button is pressed halfway The AF assist illuminator will not light in ll or amp modes or if Off has been selected for Custom Setting a3 Built in AF assist illuminator pg 174 The illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 f
179. hoose tab and press P orea fi 2 Select the desired menu Choose tab Highlight Recent settings or My Menu and i My Menu OK press amp The selected menu will be displayed a E Recent settings 2 Recent Settings Viewing Recent Settings The recent settings menu lists the twenty most RECENT SETTINGS mal Image quality NORM recently used settings Z ISO sensitivity settings Movie settings _ 3Assign FUNC button 5 4 Choose tab gl 224 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20 options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below EE Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items a e Image quality In My Menu highlight Add items and press gt SO sent ste 3 Assign FUNC button Add items Remove items Rank items EJ Choose tab 2 Select a menu Add items Highlight the name of the menu containing the aback menu l HH Shooting menu option you wish to add and press gt 2 Custom setting menu 7 Setup menu Ki Retouch menu 3 Select an item Add items 0 Set Picture Control A Manage Picture Control Highlight the desired menu item and press v Image quality i Items currently in My Menu are indicated by a White balance checkmark items indicated by a N icon can not t be selected Auto distortion con
180. i 11 points The current setting is shown in the shooting information display pg 10 Description User selects focus point using multi selector camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Use with stationary subjects Default setting for amp mode In AF A and AF C autofocus modes user selects focus point manually but camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if subject briefly leaves selected point Use with erratically moving subjects In AF S autofocus mode user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only Default for mode Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point If type G or D lens is used camera can distinguish human et from background for improved subject detection Default for amp Z laa IZ P S A and M modes In AF A and AF C autofocus modes user selects focus point using multi selector If user changes composition after focusing camera uses 3D tracking to select new focus point and keep focus locked on original subject while shutter release button is pressed halfway Use to recompose photographs while shooting relatively static subjects If subject leaves viewfinder remove your finger from shutter release button and recompose photograph with subject in selected focus point In AF S autofocus mode user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only ISO AUTO _ r
181. ic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right The DK 21 Viewfinder Eyepiece Cup Before attaching the DK 5 viewfinder eyepiece cap and other viewfinder accessories pg 239 remove the viewfinder eyepiece cup by placing your fingers underneath the flanges at either side and sliding it off as shown at right 17 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options can be accessed MENU button from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button Tabs Choose from playback shooting Custom Settings setup retouch and recent settings menus see below Cormat memo card mn Slidershows position in CD brightness current menu lean image sensor ock mirror up for cleaning Current settings are shown by icons if 2 is displayed help for current item E can be viewed by pressing Yom button Menu options pg 21 Options in current menu The following menus are available gt Playback pg 160 Adjust playback settings and manage photos Shooti
182. ictures Small pictures are indicated by a gray border during full frame playback Playback zoom is not available when small pictures are displayed 217 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals the results which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging application The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size pp 62 63 all options are available To create an NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay Image overlay Image 1 Image 2 Preview Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press gt The dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image 1 highlighted fei Zoom OW Select 2 Display NEF RAW images nota Press to display a picture selection dialog ts listing only NEF RAW images created with this u E filth camera note that hidden images are not ray tee ist displayed and can not be selected Zoom__ WOK 3 Highlight a photograph TET Use the multi selector to highlight the first ed 2 lear photograph in the overlay To view the TS Faye highlighted photograph full frame press and RO dt ae al dae hold the amp button Se 4 Select the highlighted photograph Image 2 Preview Press to select the highlighted
183. ies for the D100 D70 series or D50 or with the MS D70 CR2 battery holder EN EL3e Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL3e shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels pg 34 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged pg 208 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed An AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes a Focal length scale Mounting index Focal length index Lens hood pg 273 Lens cap j VR vibration reduction switch Zoom ring Focus ring pg 59 273 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap After confirming that the camera is off remove the rear lens cap from the lens and remove the camera body cap 2 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place Mounting index If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority 25 26 EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when
184. ighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing no ia will appear in the control panel and viewfinder at default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Press the shutter release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again get o Sra ug Ec LIAN Viewfinder 6 Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the control panel V Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 179 The default setting is six seconds Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list PRE amp Select OKSet To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a
185. ination 175 AF area mode 57 173 3D tracking 11 points 56 173 auto area 36 173 dynamic area 56 173 single point 56 173 AF area mode 173 A M switch 25 Amber 97 216 Aperture 79 maximum 60 minimum 26 78 Aperture priority auto 82 Assign AE L AF L button 200 Assign FUNC button 197 Audio video cable 146 Auto bracketing 92 191 193 Auto bracketing set 191 ADL bracketing 193 AE amp flash 191 AE only 191 Flash only 191 WB bracketing 191 Auto FP 195 Auto image rotation 205 Auto meter off 35 179 Auto meter off delay 179 Auto area 36 173 Autofocus 54 55 57 B Backlight 8 183 Battery 22 23 34 184 208 charging 22 pack 184 208 239 Battery info 208 Beep 180 Blue 97 Body cap 3 25 240 Bracketing 92 191 193 Active D Lighting 193 exposure 92 flash 92 white balance 191 Bracketing order 195 Built in AF assist illuminator 174 Bulb 85 Burst 122 c Calendar 136 Camera Control Pro 2 148 240 Center focus point 174 Center weighted area 9 178 CL mode shooting speed 182 Clean image sensor 244 Clock 27 204 battery 28 204 CLS 233 Color balance 216 Color space 167 Adobe RGB 167 sRGB 167 Color temperature 99 Computer 148 Control Panel 7 CPU contacts 228 CPU lens 26 229 Creative Lighting System 233 Custom Settings 171 Customize command dials 201 D Date and time 27 204 Daylight saving time 27 204 DCF v
186. information in full frame Menus _ playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While and menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu playback for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press or On image review excluded is the same as On except that the command dials can not be used during image review If Off is selected the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus Reverse rotation f6 No Memory Card If Release locked the default setting is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option This option is available in all shooting modes f7 Reverse Indicators At the default setting of etiitiiniitiite 0 the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on
187. ing graph F lens focal length lt 55mm 55mm lt F lt 135mm om 135 mm lt F WS amp gt YTNO AMD amp K OAD OAD x 2 oe A 4 j 8 f4 A gt N Se e n BEZZ 8 E f32 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed 30 O b ol A N _ The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 17 3 EV are reduced to 17 3 EV 263 Bracketing Programs The number of shots and bracketing increment are shown in the control panel as follows Number of frames GE Ean Bracketing increment Bracketing progress indicator EE The Bracketing Progress Indicator and Number of Frames Number of frames Progress indicator Description 3E lt Ep 3 frames unmodified negative positive oF 2 frames unmodified positive JF Ep 2 frames unmodified negative Order when Under gt MTR gt over is selected for Custom Setting e6 Bracketing order is negative unmodified positive three frames or negative unmodified two frames EE Bracketing Increment Autoexposure and flash bracketing White balance EV steps for exposure cntrl set to 1 3 EV bracketing Display Inrement Display Imaement Display Increment a 3 ee p w ra al Ls N a gt
188. itivity settings Press A or V to move the item up or down in My Movie settings 3 Assign FUNC button E Menu and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items Technical Notes This chapter covers the following topics Compatible LENSES A orenera a E EA EEES EN E AREARE 228 CompatiblerGPRWilenses scx a A E E R A A A A 229 Kene OE E A A E E E E T E uenen neces 230 Optional Flash Units Speedlights seeeseessoessesssoeesocssoesscessoeesoessoesseescccesoessoesseeesee 233 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS sssesseesssesssesssesseesseesseeeseeeseesssesssesssessersseesse 233 FIASIWROMEACES Srey erence a E A A ches trarice A AA AA 238 Other ACCESSONES a raae IELAS ANE EE REEE EETAS SAE AISEEE N RT ES ROE 239 Canin g torthe Gane Tane aA A A A aa EE EE E Eare 243 SrA E EE E A CE I E A T E R 243 EEEN A T A rests A E E A A T E A E E E E 243 Ne LOW RaSSFIITCK Armaan unre ati ire A A E O E E acre one 244 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions essessesoesoesoesocsoescescescescesoeseesceseesee 248 MFOUDIESNOOUING recccescitaccess ssunsisersscrtanevscevs eooteerubesioss ence EEA TAEAE AE EAS CTAA 250 Erron MESSAGES A RAENT AR ES ea AAE AAE ASAS 255 PUD DSI Air ar e e A Eai ASTES PEE EETRI E LES NE AE TI RTOS 258 Available Settings and Defaults ace a a e e A A 258 Memory Cardi C a Pa IV E A E AAAA RA A A tes 262 EXPOSUIT PLOG LIN E e E A AEE ds eat nous E E asco 263 Bracketing PrograrniS oa a
189. k adjust no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening ee A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Not available when Active D Lighting pg 119 is on reset if Active D Lighting is activated after value is changed Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced brightness Does not Brightness affect exposure Not available when Active D Lighting pg 119 is on reset if s101 u0 31N D1q IlL s u wzsnfpe jenuew Active D Lighting is activated after value is changed Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it te Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make reds more purple blues more green and greens more yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple sjuawsn pe jenuey Filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs Choose effects from Off the default setting yellow orange red and green pg 112 Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B amp W black and Toning
190. kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant applications and printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support DCF select the appropriate color space manually For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNX supplied and Capture NX 2 available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with this camera Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds This option is available in all modes Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s are processed to reduce noise The time required for processing is roughly equal to the current shutter speed during processing wan ar will blink in the shutter soeed aperture displays and photographs can not be taken In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Noise reduction is not visible in pictures played back before processing is complete noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete Off default Long exposure noise reduction off
191. ks p l p i Memory card does not Images created with other Cannot select this file contain images that devices can not be 209 can be retouched retouched Memory card does not No images for contain NEF RAW Take NEF RAW 62 retouching photographs images Check printer Printer error CALPE Tar esumne 150 select Continue if available Paper in printeris not Insert paper of correct size of selected size and select Continue Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select Paper jam printer Continue Check paper Out of paper Check ink supply Check ink To resume select Ink error f Continue l Repl ink an Printer is out of ink as CSRGEL Continue See printer manual for more information 150 150 Insert paper of selected size Printer is out of paper deeler Continde 150 f 150 150 Out of ink 257 B 258 Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics e Available Settings and Defaults rsrsrs A EE EA e Memory Card Capacity sseesseesseesseesseesseesseesssesssesssesssesssesssessseesseesseesseesseesseesseesseeoseeoserosees EDOS Ure PROC IN ae E ER E E eseedtneas Bracketing Programs es sesesseessessesssesseeseesseeseesseossesseesecoseoseesseeseeoseosseoseossesseesseoseoseessceseesseossee e Fask CONTON se E canes ectdcdeces ance besesseeieceseeaeaastacaecate euceenses e Shutter Speeds Available with the Built in FlaSh s sseessesssessessesss
192. lash and the shutter release will be T disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted 192 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the BkT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and WEE is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 75 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display pg 97 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded BE ADL Bracketing 1 Select ADL bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e4 Auto Mi aEatsh ooo bracketing set Flash only WB WB bracketing EA ADL bracketing fa 2 Enable bracketing Pressing the BkT button rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator is displayed in the control panel Allie progress indicator Control panel BKT button Main command dial i25 F5b 637 Viewfinder 193 3
193. lay will flash Custom Setting b1 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 1 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV 0 See Also If tanii 0 the default setting is selected for Custom Setting f7 Reverse indicators pg 201 the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select Beetles Ovemoet Tahini O to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right EE Long Time Exposures M Mode Only Shutter speeds of hu ta and can be used for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks To prevent blurring caused by camera shake use a tripod and an optional remote control pg 241 or remote cord pg 241 Shutter speed Description Shutter remains open while shutter release button is held down Tripod and optional remote cord are recommended to prevent blur Optional ML L3 remote control required pg 241 Select mode M set shutter speed to kisi iv and select delayed remote or quick response remote mode s pg 68 Shutter opens when shutter release button on remote control is pressed and remains open for thirty minutes or until shutter release button is pressed a second time bo Aah Da Pnl rr re 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface To prevent loss of power befo
194. lect Index print See page 156 for more information 153 3 Select pictures or choose a date If you chose Print select or Print DPOF in Step 2 use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press the amp button To select the current picture for printing press the 9i button and press A The picture will be marked with a 4 icon and the number of prints we Oe will be set to 1 Keeping the amp button pressed z press A or W to specify the number of prints up ee to 99 to deselect the picture press V when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected OSet Zoom OKOK PG X 18709 2008 0 14 08 If you chose Select date in Step 2 press A or V to highlight a date and press to select To view TTT the pictures taken on the selected date press 19 09 2008 QET Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures or press amp to view the current picture Confirm full screen Select date 15 09 2008 i r _ set 4 Display printing options y Select date Press to display PictBridge printing options ee Border Time stamp 154 5 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Page size Border Time stamp 6 Start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been
195. lect Set Picture Control SHOOTNGMEN Pa set Picture Control In the shooting menu pg 165 highlight Set vein nee oR Picture Control and press gt P E ISO sensitivity settings Active D Lighting EJ Color space 2 Select a Picture Control Set Picture Control cy 28DStandard Highlight the desired Picture Control and press E K EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait FILS Landscape 2 CCT Adjust The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid Hiva E showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Controlin amp relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when ayi Monochrome is selected To select a different Picture Control press A or V then press gt to display Picture Control options and press 69 2 lLlit Adjust OKOK The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information ea BEBB display when the M button is pressed Picture Controls can also be Je aT 5 Jj 3 selected in the shooting information display pg 12 EOF som N mu ESD Picture Control indicator 109 110 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the user s creative intent Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to individual settings 1 Select a Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Co
196. lt in flash will pop automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Press the ly button to frame pictures in the monitor 1 Press the Ly button button The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder mie a oa elelea F 27s 20m00s 125 SE B8Auto S37I Item 1 Shooting mode The amount of time remaining before live view ends automatically Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less 2 Time remaining 3 No movie icon Autofocus mode he current autofocus mode 5 Image size he option currently selected for image size 6 Image quality he option currently selected for image quality 7 White balance he option currently selected for white balance Time remaining movie mode 0 Monitor brightness Audio recording indicator Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies 170 50 44 43 44 2 Choose an autofocus mode Press the AF button and rotate the command dial until one of the following autofocus modes is displayed in the monitor note that these autofocus modes differ from those available in other shooting modes ial Mode Description aa The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects facing the camera Use for
197. m 2 and 1 EV 1 3 step Ms default b2 Easy Exposure Compensation This option available in P S A and M modes controls whether the 4 button is needed to set exposure compensation pg 90 If On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation can be set by rotating one of the command dials see note On below Selected value does not change when exposure meters turn off camera is turned off or Off is selected for Custom Setting b2 Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E4 button and rotating the main default command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On is selected for Custom Setting b2 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f5 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 201 Customize command dials gt Change main sub on Po Subscommand dial Sub command dial Main command dial Sub command dial N A apow ainsodx 177 b3 Center Weighted Area When calculating exposure center weighted metering Option assigns the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the 6 b 6mm frame The diameter of this circle can be set to 6 8 or 8 b 8mm default 10 mm This option is available in P S A and M modes only 10 610 mm b4 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option available in all shooting m
198. m 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR II 24mm 35 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 1 5 m 4ft 11 in ee ee 1 0m 3 ft 3in AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 1 0m 3ft 3in PC E NIKKOR 24mm f 3 5 ED 2 0m 6 ft 7in 232 Optional Flash Units Speedlights The D90 can be used with CLS compatible flash units Remove the accessory shoe cover when attaching optional flash units The built in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography The Creative Lighting System supports the following features e i TTL flash control Improved through the lens TTL flash control for use with CLS see page 265 Flash level is set using monitor pre flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject ensuring optimal flash output e Advanced Wireless Lighting Allows i TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units e FVlock pg 198 Locks flash level at the metered value allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level e Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 195 Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field 233 234 EE CLS Compatible Flas
199. m OKOK To view the pictures taken on the Q button highlighted date press 9 Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures or press amp to view the current picture full screen Press Qa A to return to the date list 13 09 2008 10 14 08 2 Select the highlighted date wa Select date O 15 09 2008 Press in the date list or in the thumbnail list to select all pictures taken on the highlighted date Selected dates are marked with a M icon Confirm OKOK 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a date highlight it and press To deselect a selected date in the thumbnail list press 4 Press to complete the operation pe Select date A confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete all images taken on highlight Yes and press 68 selected date 161 Delete The delete menu contains the following options Option Description nom Selected Delete selected pictures Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date ALL All Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback 7 Protected and Hidden Images Images that are protected or hidden will not be deleted Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback Description Only photos in the folder currently selected for Active folder in the shooting menu are displayed during playback This option is selected automatically when a photo Current ze default is taken If a memory ca
200. m is only available if the GP 1 is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude and Coordinated Universal Time UTC as reported by the GP 1 Disable Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock 125 126 More on Playback This chapter describes how to view photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback Eull Erame PLAY ID AGCK cercscsssccsczsscseososcesecesanccccessusscascsrcsaasoscecsuseuses seocessasvansceecesaussoesexones 128 PROTOIINTORMALIO Mac reecee ees E A teat cancers A A E A tee 129 MAUI NAM PLAY DAG Keres EA errare Eea oct S AEA aE AE STA Iis 135 Calendar Play Dack osissa tebe Ashir E TALEE AeA LAES Sse AARTS s Co EESE CAASD SE ESE CLAAS SFEER A tT ETIR 136 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM eesseeseeseesocescesoesscesoesocescesoesscescescesocesoesoceseesoe 138 Protecting Photographs from Deletion sccssccsssccssessrcessccesssescceescccsscesssceenes 139 Deleting Individual PhotographS sseesseessecssoesseessecesoessoesseeesoeesocssoessocssoeesoessocesoseso 140 PUCCIAVO LION TAR AE A E E E E E E T E T 141 Slide SROWS a e aE ea ea aA Ae EEEa e see Se Aaaa AAAA A ENEA AASE Ane AE PATEAR 143 127 128 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the gt button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor do 2 100NCD90 DSC ao a
201. manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 250 s or faster other settings with the exception of Custom Setting d6 in the case of continuous low speed mode at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer Oy Continuous low speed Self timer Quick response To choose the release mode press the H button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel D button Main command dial Control panel The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on the number of the images in the buffer recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card Continuous Mode To take pictures in HiL continuous low speed
202. memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D90 All cards of the designated make and capacity can be used regardless of speed SanDisk 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB t 8GBt Toshiba 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB t 8GB t 16GB t 32GB t Panasonic 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB t 8GB t 16GB t 32GB t 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB t Lexar Media Platinum Il 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GBt Professional 1GB 2GB 4GB t f card will be used with card reader or other device check that device supports 2GB cards t SDHC compliant If card will be used with card reader or other device check that device SD supports SDHC Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After Camera using the camera at the beach
203. minator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also See page 231 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist 174 a4 AF Point Illumination Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder This option is available in all shooting modes Option Description Auto The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish default contrast with the background The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of the brightness of the On background Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see Off The selected focus point is not highlighted a5 Focus Point Wrap Around Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another This option is available in all shooting modes Option Description Focus point selection wraps around from top to ee Tat s bottom bottom to top right to left and left to right ee f z so that for example pressing when a focus point at a E the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted so selects the corresponding
204. mirror up for cleaning Lock mirror up for cleaning Turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press gt note that this option is not available at battery levels of 2m or below 4 Press 6N Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes will appear in the mirror lifts and shutter opens the control panel and viewfinder To restore ee ae normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera Off 5 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The viewfinder display will turn off and the control panel display will blink 6 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 8 7 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap Use a Reliable Power Source
205. more information see the GP 1 manual When the camera establishes communication with the GP 1 a EA icon will be displayed in the control panel Photo information for pictures taken while the Gi icon is displayed will include an additional page pg 133 recording the current latitude longitude altitude and Coordinated Universal Time UTC If no data are received from the GP 1 for two seconds the GB icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information GPS Data GPS data are only recorded when the Gi icon is displayed Confirm that the GB icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting A flashing AA icon indicates that the GP 1 is searching for a signal pictures taken while the icon is flashing will not include GPS data EE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when the GP 1 is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for Enable the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 179 This default reduces the drain on the battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing Exposure meters will not turn off while the GP 1 is connected GPS data will always be recorded e Position This ite
206. mory card Exif version 2 21 The D90 supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D80 multi power battery pack are given below e CIPA standard One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 850 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D80 Approximately 850 shots Two EN EL3e batteries MB D80 Approximately 1700 shots six AA batteries MB D80 Approximately 600 shots e Nikon standard One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 4200 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D80 Approximately 4200 shots Tw
207. n AE L AF L button AF S autofocus mode pg 54 Focus will lock automatically when the in focus indicator appears and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see above 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the AE L AF L button pressed AF A AF C or the shutter release button pressed halfway AF S allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting 57 Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance Continuous Mode pg 65 Use the AE L AF L button to lock focus in continuous mode See Also Custom Setting f4 Assign AE L AF L Button pg 200 controls the behavior of the AE L AF L button 58 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus non AF Nikkor lenses or when autofocus does not produce the desired results pg 55 To use manual focus set the camera focus mode selector and or the lens focus mode switch as follows e AF S lenses Set the lens focus mode switch to M e AF lenses Set the both the camera focus mode selector and the lens focus mode switch to M e Manual focus lenses Set the camera focus mode switch to M To focus manually adjust the lens focu
208. n The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down 38 Step 6 Shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to release the shutter and record the photograph The access lamp next to the memory card slot cover will light Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete Access lamp EE Turning the Camera Off Turn the camera off when shooting is complete Power switch EAN Tn Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the number of exposures remaining will be displayed in the control panel Auto Flash off Mode Choose this mode where flash photography is prohibited when photographing infants or to capture natural lighting under low light conditions I ett hae a mode amp mode w lt s sy SS i 39 40 The Built in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in mode the built in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity pg 266 remove lens hoods when using the flash If the flash is raised photographs can only be taken when the flash ready indic
209. n representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com xviii Introduction This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts how to use the camera menus and how to ready the camera for use COVERY IG WE seers cere e raat aah ra lauren cat ata a N a mace tates EE 2 Getting LO KNOW TNE Game lasciccssccccssdeccsncersercesuacasercocotossseccasecdcuccesastecussvereccsncersecese 3 MINE TC aIMe ha BOY oae ts A A A E A raster ver ees E A E A 3 TheModeDialk aeaa aa e a A ote tea A E E E E 6 MMEYGOMtOMPR ANCL aae A a a E E A A E E O ATN 7 TheViewimnade Er a nce oe A a a ne A A 9 The Shooting Information DE pIIy a e aaea a a A A E AR S 10 Ehe Commnandi Dials eona n a AE A O EE 13 Attaching the AN DC1 Camera TAD a E A 17 PHE BEM TOMOMTOKCOVEE AE A E A A A E AA e 17 The DK 21 Viewfinder Eyepiece CUD aaraa a A R 17 Galine Fa NA E E E A A T E R I E O R E 18 Uema Camera Menua e T EN e a 19 aao E A E E E eae ae E EE ERTE E E Ain a Rare Oy 21 FUESE E L T T T asaone ocean aeteaenosice 22 Ehargethe Battery aa eS T A R 22 Mente ALTE E A A E A A AA E A A A 23 Atta cM ARE CIS a a a Aa A A a A A A A A 25 BAS SEUA E A A TA AE A REANA E OA 27 H erna Memo Cards aa a E E A a A A eeees rate 29 Adjust Viewinder OCUS a E A E A E A A O N 32 Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera To get the most
210. n the setup menu and press P 3 Select Clean now Highlight Clean now and press P The message shown at right will be displayed while cleaning is in progress The message shown at right will be displayed when cleaning is complete 244 a SETUP MENU e Format memory card LCD brightness 0 m Lock mirror up for cleaning 4 Video mode NTSG HDMI World time fH Language Clean image sensor sm Clean now OK Clean at startup shutdown amp es Clean image sensor Cleaning image sensor es Clean image sensor BE Clean at Startup Shutdown 1 Select Clean at startup shutdown Clean image sensor Display the Clean image sensor menu as described in Step 1 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and press P E Y Clean now Clean at startup shutdown SN gt 2 Select an option Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown Highlight one of the following options and gt oon ress FF Clean at shutdown p A Clean at startup amp shutdowr OK amp Cleaning off Option Description The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on Clean at The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown shutdown each time the camera is turned off Clean at startup Ost amp shutdown default amp Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off 0N Clean at startup rT The image sensor is cleaned automatically at sta
211. neered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e Forusers in the U S A http www nikonusa com e Forusers in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http vwww nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Niko
212. nel Image quality can also be adjusted from the shooting menu pg 165 amp QUAL button Main command dial Control panel NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in software such as Capture NX 2 available separately or ViewNX supplied NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images NEF RAW NEF JPEG When photographs taken at NEF RAW JPEG Fine NEF RAW JPEG Normal or NEF RAW JPEG Basic are viewed on the camera only the JPEG image will be displayed When photographs taken at these settings are deleted both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted White balance bracketing pg 191 is not available when an NEF RAW JPEG option is selected for image quality Selecting an NEF RAW JPEG option cancels white balance bracketing Image Size Image size is measured in pixels The following options are available Image size Size pixels Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi L default 4 288 x 2 848 54 5 x 36 2 cm 21 4 x 14 2 in M 3 216 x 2 136 40 8 x 27 1 cm 16 1 x 10 7 in S 2 144 x 1 424 27 2 X 18 1 cm 10 7 x 7 1 in Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Print size decreases as printer resolution increases Image size can be set by pressing the amp
213. new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored pg 104 103 EE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 104 1 Select PRE Preset manual White balance Ea A Incandescent Highlight Preset manual in the white balance y DEE menu pg 95 and press gt 4 fy Shade i Choose color temp PRA Preset manual gt 2 Select a destination White balance O a j Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 Ca FH and press the amp button kl PRE eSelect Ok Set Qa button 3 Copy d 0 to the selected preset White balance s Preset manual Highlight Copy d 0 and press If a comment has been created for d 0 pg 107 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected r preset Choosing a White Balance Preset To select another white balance preset in the Preset manual menu see RRM Preset manual Step 3 above press A to highlight the current white balance preset d 0 d 4 and press e Edit comment Select image Copy d 0 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset manual White balance
214. ng pg 165 Adjust shooting settings G Custom Settings pg 171 Personalize camera settings T Setup pg 202 Format memory cards and perform basic camera setup K Retouch pg 209 Create retouched copies of existing photographs Select from the twenty most recently used menu items If Recentsettings pg 224 desired a custom menu My Menu can be displayed in place of Recent settings pg 224 Using Camera Menus The multi selector and button are used to navigate the camera menus Move cursor up button Select highlighted 4 gt highlighted item Cancel and return el CI item gt to previous menu or display sub V ri menu Move cursor down Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight the icon for the current menu Press lt to highlight the icon for the current menu Select a menu Press A or W to position the cursor in the selected menu whiten ity ae jmage e folder pelete playba ide ima pisplay M review rotate tall MENU button FG ie SHOOTING MENU Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Image quality Image size White balance ISO sensitivity settings Active D Lighting Color space PLAYBACK MENU e Delete Playback folder Hide image _ Display mode Image review Rotate tall Pictmotion d Slide show 1
215. ng Small picture from the retouch menu however differs from that described at the beginning of this section instead of selecting a single photograph and then choosing a picture size the user selects a picture size first and then selects one or more photographs to copy at the selected size as described below Selecting Small picture from the retouch menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 Follow the steps below to create small copies of multiple pictures 1 Select Choose size Small picture Highlight Choose size and press gt Select image Choose size 2 Choose the desired size Small picture Choose size Highlight desired size and press to select and mi 640x480 return to the previous menu l Ca 3201240 Lm 160x120 3 Choose Select image Small picture Highlight Select image and press gt Select image ie Choose size 4 Select pictures Q button Small picture Highlight pictures using the multi A selector and press the amp button to select or deselect pg 160 Selected PES pictures are marked by an icon kee CHN aa CI a CO 4 5 Press to complete the operation Small picture Create small picture Press A confirmation dialog will be 1 image displayed highlight Yes and press to copy pictures at the selected size and return to playback To exit without creating copies highlight No and press or press MENU to exit to the retouch menu Viewing Small P
216. nnecting or disconnecting the video cable 2 Connect the supplied audio video cable as shown Audio white Video yellow Connect to camera Connect to video device C 3 Tune the television to the video channel 4 Turn the camera on and press the gt button During playback images will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on the television screen Video Mode pg 203 Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device Television Playback Use of an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 5a or EH 5 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen 146 High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini pin HDMI cable available separately from third party suppliers 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to camera Connect to high definition device choose cable with connector for connected device 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel 4 Turn the camera on and press
217. ntains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print 7 Index print n Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu ARAE pg 153 displays the images on the memory E A a card as shown at right VIOT OF OKPrint 2 Display printing options y Setup Press 8 to display PictBridge printing options Page size Border Time stamp Adjust printing options Choose page size border and time stamp options as described on page 147 a warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small 4 Start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press 68 OK Cancel 156 HE Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF Selecting Print set DPOF from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 1 Choose Select set we Print set DPOF Highlight Select set and press gt Deselect all T 7 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture in full screen press amp button To select the current picture for printing press the Qld button and press A The picture will be Qed button marked with a amp icon and the number of prints ma
218. ntly deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding pg 148 1 Turn the camera on Power switch X 2 Press the m buttons i button 3 button Hold the rimm 3 and T buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds A blinking F a r will appear in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder To exit without formatting the memory card wait six seconds the default setting until F ar stops blinking or press any button other than the im 53 and T buttons 3 Press the a buttons again Press the im SS and T buttons together a second time while F a r is blinking to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings 30 EE Removing Memory Cards After confirming that the access lamp is off turn the camera off open the memory card slot cover and press the card in to eject it The card can then be removed by hand V Memory Cards e Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera e Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for r
219. ntrol in the Set Picture Control menu pg 109 and press gt 2 Adjust settings Press A or W to highlight the desired setting and press lt or P to choose a value pg 111 Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the tf button 3 Press 69 Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk in the Set Picture Control menu Sharpening Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue a Grid ONOK Reset Set Picture Control C ED Standard ENL Neutral EWI Vivid OK EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait ELS Landscape 2 CCT Adjust Vivid Q Quick adjust Sharpening i Contrast m Brightness Ot Saturation E CEE aB Grid ONOK Reset Set Picture Control wy ESD Standard EPT Portrait FILS Landscape Grid Adjust EE Picture Control Settings Option Description Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening Sharpening yee according to the type of scene or choose from values between Quic
220. o EN EL3e batteries MB D80 Approximately 8400 shots six AA batteries MB D80 Approximately 1900 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s after photograph is taken monitor is turned on for 4 s tester waits for exposure meters to turn off after monitor is turned off flash fired at full power once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens under the following test conditions release mode set to GH autofocus mode set to AF C image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium white balance set to A ISO sensitivity set to ISO 200 shutter speed 250 s focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times after exposure meters have been on for 3 s six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using a GP 1 GPS unit e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e batteries e Keep th
221. o approximately 1 10 s See Also For information on changing the timer duration and choosing the number of shots taken see Custom Setting c3 Self timer pg 179 For information on setting a beep to sound as the timer counts down see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 180 67 68 Using an Optional Remote Control 8 Use the optional ML L3 remote control for self portraits pg 241 or to operate the camera remotely 7 Before Using the Remote Control Before using the remote control for the first time remove the clear plastic battery insulator sheet Mount the camera ona tripod Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable level surface 2 Select or mode Press the Gl button and rotate the main command dial to select one of the following modes Ey button Main command dial Control panel Mode Description Shutter released about 2 s after remote shutter release button is pressed Shutter released when remote shutter release button is pressed a Delayed remote Quick response remote The camera will enter stand by mode At default settings single frame or continuous mode will be restored if no operations are performed for about a minute 3 Frame the photograph Frame the photograph If autofocus is in effect the camera shutter release button can be used to set focus although only the shutter release button on the remote control can be used to release the shutter
222. od is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor 41 42 W Close Up Use for close up shots of flowers insects and other small objects a macro lens can be used to focus at very close ranges The camera automatically focuses on the subject in the center focus point Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur X Sports High shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off automatically Night Portrait Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the background in portraits taken under low light Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur Focus Point At default settings the camera selects the focus point as follows e Z u and iZ modes The camera selects the focus point automatically e amp mode The camera focuses on the subject in the center focus point Other focus points can be selected with the multi selector pg 56 e amp mode The camera focuses continuously while the shutter release button is pressed halfway tracking the subject in the center focus point If the subject leaves the center focus point the camera will continue to focus based on information from the other focus points The starting focus point can be selected with the multi selector pg 56 The Built in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in Z amp or mode the bui
223. odes to fine tune the exposure value selected by the camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 1 6 EV V Fine Tuning Exposure Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation amp icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation pg 90 is preferred in most situations 178 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway This option is available in all shooting modes c2 Auto Meter off Delay This option available in all shooting modes controls how long the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are performed Choose from 45 6s 8 s 16 s 30 s 1 minute 5 minutes 10 minutes or 30 minutes The shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off automatically when the exposure meters turn off Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life c3 Self Timer This option available in all shooting modes controls the length of the shutter release delay Self timer delay see right and the number of shots Number of shots
224. oftware created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera e Manage custom Picture Controls pg 117 Rename or delete custom Picture Controls Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers six preset Picture Controls In P S A and M modes you can choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene in other modes the camera selects a Picture Control automatically Option Description FS Standard standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for natural results Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors MC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs n KPT Portrait Lends a natural texture and rounded feel to the skin of portrait subjects ALS Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes ENL Neutral VI Vivid BE Choosing a Picture Control 1 Se
225. olor temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu 99 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Direct Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in measurement final photograph and white balance is measured by camera pg 101 Copy from existing photograph White balance is copied from photo on memory card pg 105 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset pg 107 d 0 Stores last value measured for white balance pg 101 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured White balance d 1 PRE amp Select OKSet Store values copied from images on memory card Pann pg 105 rs White balance Zoom Wset PRE eSelect OWSet 100 EE Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure i
226. ommand dial flexible program Rotate the main command dial to the right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Rotate the main command dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect a O indicator appears in dial the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off See Also See page 263 for information on the built in exposure program 80 Mode S Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects high shutter speeds to freeze motion To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Rotate the mode dial to S 2 Choose a shutter speed Press the shutter release button halfway to activate the exposure meters and rotate the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed from values between 30 s and Main command 1 4 000 S dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 255 for information on what to do if flashing
227. on on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed 100NCD90 DSC_0009 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 02 39 4288x2848 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to eight pages of information for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display mode pg 163 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken z NOISE REDUC HI 150 NORM D LATITUDE NORMAL 1 ACT D LIGHT f THUR an 36 371 RETOUCH D LIGHT ING ia f J Me de 3 ALTITUDE i P 1 250 F11 200 Ee MBAUTO o 0 SRB FESD ANAA v AN 100NCD90 DSC 0001 JPG NORMAL 100NCD90_ DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 15 09 2008 10 15 29 4288x2848 NIKON D90 TRIM TIME UTC 13 09 2008 SPRING HAS COME SP HAS CONE 3636 Y a nN A WHITE BALANCE AUTO 0 0 a di PICTURE CNTRL STANDARD DAD a a 85105 a SHARPENING FLASH WODE m Built fn TTL 1 3 COMIRETT i A a a CMD METTL 3 0 ome 43 0 a i AN Samo 0 0 Wo a aaa NIKON_D90 NIKON 90 1 12 NIKO RGB histogram Highlights Shooting data 1 Shooting data 2 e e EE File Information 4 9 Neem elke xe UUE 5 5 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 1 Protect statuS 139 4 File NAME
228. on the third page of the photo information display pg 132 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Inout acommentas described on page 169 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to attach the comment to all BREE subsequent photographs Attach comment can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing gt Dore Input comment M Attach comment Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On the default option is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback pg 128 or when viewed in ViewNX or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 240 The following orientations are recorded Landscape wide orientation Camera rotated 90 clockwise Camera rotated 90 counterclockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down 7 Auto Image Rotation In St and GH release modes pg 65 the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all photographs in the same burst even if camera orientation is changed during shooting Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 160 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting image
229. ool white fluorescent lights High temp mercury vapor 7 200 Direct sunlight 5 200 Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight 4 Flash 5 400 Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 Use in daylight under overcast skies G amp Shade 8 000 Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 4 Choose color temp aa ea Choose color temperature from list of values pg 99 Use subject light source or existing photograph as PRE Preset manual EER reference for white balance pg 100 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 95 To select a value for white balance press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel White balance can also be adjusted from the shooting menu pg 165 WB button Main command dial Control panel Fluorescent The bulb type is chosen using the White balance option in the shooting menu pg 165 See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 Auto bracketing set pg 191 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 191 for more information 96 Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an ima
230. or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire N Use appropriate cables e When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations N CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth XV xvi Notices e No part of the manuals inclu
231. ose a shutter speed exposure mode Sor M pp 81 83 Choose an aperture exposure mode A or M pp 82 83 Sub command dial Control panel Choose a metering method pg 87 Main command dial Set exposure compensation pg 90 a 44 button Main command dial Activate or cancel bracketing l os select number of shots in 4 5 bracketing sequence pp 92 6 DSO 4 191 Not displayed in ADL bracketing pg 193 NWN al BKT button Maincommand dial Control panel 15 16 Select bracketing exposure increment pg 92 192 BE White Balance Choose a white balance setting pg 95 Fine tune white balance pg 97 set color temperature pg 99 or choose a white balance preset pg 106 EE Flash Settings Choose flash mode pg 71 Adjust flash compensation pg 91 we lN So BCA f A lt II MS BKT button Yom WB Sub command dial Maincommand button dial Kes A Yom WB Sub command button dial 4 button Main command dial dial N Control panel gt LE Control panel Control panel gt Control panel Attaching the AN DC1 Camera Strap Attach the strap as shown below The BM 10 Monitor Cover A clear plast
232. osesressersseseese 87 Battery indicator ssseesesssesessssssssssssssssssssss 34 Black and white indicator csseseeeees 181 FOCUS DOIN sacssssssscesssvesenessnsncsoneeens 54 173 174 Center focus point normal frame 174 Center focus point wide frame 174 No memory card warning 181 FOCUS indicator esssesssesscseseessseeseseeees 38 60 Flash value FV lock indicator 198 Shutter SPCC eesecsesesesecscscsesseseseesess 81 83 Aperture f number sesesssesssssesseesssesss 82 83 Battery indicator ss ssseesesessssessseesssersseesssessss 34 White balance bracketing indicator 191 Bracketing indicator sssesseesssessseesssersseesss 92 ISO sensitivity indicator sssesssersseesssesss 74 Y The Viewfinder Display Owing to the characteristics of this type of viewfinder display you may notice fine lines radiating outward from the selected focus point This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the battery is totally exhausted or not inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted V The Control Panel and Viewfinder The response times and brightness of the control panel and viewfinder may vary with temperature 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Number of exposures remaining 35 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills
233. oting modes d Shooting Display d1 Beep At the default setting of On a beep will sound when the camera focuses in single servo AF AF S or when shooting stationary subjects in AF A autofocus mode while the release timer is counting down in self timer and delayed remote modes pg 66 68 or when a photograph is taken in quick response remote mode pg 68 The beep will not sound when Off is selected This option is available in all shooting modes The current setting is shown in the control panel is displayed when the beep is on 3 when it is off pom FEE a eg pee too 5 i Fo 6 E d2 Viewfinder Grid Display Choose On to display on demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when composing photographs The default setting is Off This option is available in all shooting modes d3 ISO Display and Adjustment Choose Show ISO sensitivity ISO or Show ISO Easy ISO ISOS to display the current ISO sensitivity setting in the frame count displays in the control panel and viewfinder If Show ISO Easy ISO IS0 amp is selected ISO sensitivity can be set by rotating the sub command dial modes P and or main command dial mode A Choose Show frame count the default setting to show the number of exposures remaining in the frame count displays This option is available in all shooting modes d4 Viewfinder Warning Display Choose On the default setting to display the following warnings in the
234. our inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 206 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit increasing recording times If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data RR ORR and the message shown at right will be displayed Choose actien ea another reference object and repeat the process from and try again step 1 Y Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be a B E viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed Eas a a a aa when reference images are viewed on the camera 100NCD90_ DSC_0013 NDF 15 09 2008 15 41 07 207 208 Battery Info View information on the battery currently inserted in the Battery info camera if the camera is powered by an optional MB D80 Bat meter battery pack containing two EN EL3e batteries information for ala each ba
235. ow ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the show was paused it will resume from the next slide or Exit to return to the playback menu gt Restart O2s Frame interval E Exit 143 144 Connections This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to view them on a television set VIEWING Photographs OMIT cccccccsseccscrsesecssacecocscascssisserestededsssoessosteleesscscescesusseccotescsseve 146 Standard DefimitioniIPevicess sy a aA A A AAR ARAA 146 Hiiop Deimtionm DEVICES Y eaa E A A E EE 147 Connecting to a COMPUTER ia scccs ccecssucovacs szccesssscece cescaseosuoes acc seataccssssunchosuvescacsesveussosse 148 Before Connecting the Calmela wisn ea a a E A E ocean ane ianaetece arte 148 Connecting the C amela eaaa A A R A ANRE 149 Printing Photographs csccscevec scecuscvsvesavsvevecideacsstccessasoesveciselscevasvesdlcdsecerseseceulescscetoves sees 150 145 Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D2 audio video cable can be used to connect the camera to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type C mini pin High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from third party suppliers can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before co
236. owing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Depth of field preview button Mode M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to M 2 Choose aperture and shutter speed Checking exposure in the electronic analog exposure display pg 84 rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to choose an aperture Shutter speed can be set to values between 30 s and 1 4 000 5 Or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure i Laor and maximum for the lens Aperture Shutter speed Sub command dial Main command dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot pg 85 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum ma IC i Foi ry i AFA rea 5 at 4 NORM A haih eae i Eso e 83 84 The Electronic Analog Exposure Display Ifa CPU lens is attached and a shutter speed other thankiuwitthor is selected the electronic analog exposure display in the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 177 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 3 EV 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the disp
237. photograph and return to the preview display The selected image will appear as Image 1 Zoom OW Select 5 Set gain Image 2 Preview Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or to select the gain for image 1 from values between 0 1 and 2 0 The default value is 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column Zoom OW Select 218 6 Select the second photograph Image overlay Press lt or P to highlight Image 2 Repeat Steps 2 5 to select the second photo and adjust gain Zoom OW Select 7 Highlight the Preview column Image overlay Image1 Image 2 Press lt or P to highlight the Preview column Zoom OKOK 8 Preview the overlay mase overlay eriay Press A or W to highlight Overlay and press D to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and press To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain press QE Back OK Save 9 save the overlay Press amp while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be displayed full frame in A 101NCD90 DSC_0013 JPG NORMAL the monitor 15 09 2008 11 39 32 4288x2848 V Image Overlay The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and val
238. play the highlighted picture full frame 151 152 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press to select Option Page size No of copies Border Time stamp Cropping Description Menu of page sizes will be displayed options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose number of copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to choose print style from Printer default print using current printer settings Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Only options supported by current printer will be displayed Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or F to choose Printer default print using current printer settings Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu Only options supported by current printer will be displayed Menu shown at right will be displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop pictu
239. ption of the currently selected option or menu will be te displayed while the button is pressed Press A or to scroll High ISO NR E Active folder Multiple exposure ovie settings icon through the display Yom button E Multiple exposure Record the specified number of shots as a single image If no operations are performed for 30 s shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from any shots that have been taken 21 First Steps The camera is powered by an EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery supplied Charge the Batter recreate The EN EL3e is not fully charged at shipment To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 18a quick charger before use About two and a quarter hours are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery into the charger The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges i ae SL ce CHARGE O END Parts 22 4 Remove the battery when charging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Remove the battery and unplug the charger Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off Power switch
240. raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder The Icon A BS icon pg 43 will be displayed if there is insufficient space on the memory card to record movies D 2 Focus Frame the opening shot and press the shutter release button halfway to focus on your subject 3 Start reco rding Recording indicator Press the button to start recording at default settings both video and sound be recorded do not cover the microphone on the front of the camera during recording The recording time available is displayed in the monitor together with a recording indicator Exposure can be Time remaining locked by pressing the AE L AF L button pg 88 or in P S A and M modes altered using exposure compensation pg 90 Note that camera will not focus if the shutter release button is pressed halfway during recording 12S F56 Ato SHY 4 End recording To end recording press the amp button to end recording and take a still picture in the mode currently selected with the mode dial press the a 1A EN shutter release button all the way down pice i Recording will end automatically when the maximum size is reached or the memory card is full V Maximum Size Movie files can be up to 2 GB in size The maximum length is 5 min for movies with a frame size of 1280 x 720 20 min for other movies note that dep
241. rast than orange G Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing V when Toning is selected displays saturation options Press Monochrome lt or P to adjust saturation Saturation control isnot available when EEn B amp W black and white is selected SOFAS Brightness Filter effects Cyanotype 4 C O G WReset 112 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture Control SHOOTING MENU Set Picture Control In the shooting menu pg 165 highlight s a oa Manage Picture Control and press gt g aaz White balance E ISO sensitivity settings Active D Lighting amp Color space 2 Select Save ed it Manage Picture Control O Highlight Save edit and press P Load save 3 Select a Pictu re Control Manage Picture Control s Choose Picture Control vf j Highlight an existing Picture Control and press PNL Netra gt or press to proceed to step 5 and save a Monocrome copy of the highlighted Picture Control without j further modification ae OA 4 Edit the selected Picture Control See page 111 for more information To abandon Sharpening Fe Contrast any changes and start over press the T button Brightness Saturation
242. rd is inserted and this option selected before photos have been taken a message stating that the folder contains no images will be displayed during playback Select All to begin playback All _ Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Hide Image Hide or reveal selected pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Description Option Option nom Select set Hide or reveal selected pictures OO Select date Hide or reveal all pictures taken on a selected date ALL Deselect all Reveal all pictures 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image 162 Display Mode Choose the information available in the playback photo ra Display mode information display pg 129 Press A or W to highlight an pelo option then press to select the option for the photo Done information display AM appears next to selected items to as EOT O Data deselect highlight and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press Option Description Detailed photo info Highlights Highlights are shown in photo information display Very bright areas blink on and off RGB histogram Red green and blue histograms are displayed in photo information display Shooting data pages including camera name metering exposure focal length white balance and image options appe
243. re highlight Crop and press gt If Crop is selected dialog shown at right will be displayed Press amp to increase size of crop 9E to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and press Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes A Setup Start printing Page size No of copies Border Time stamp g Cropping A Page size Printer default 3 5x5 in 5x7 in A4 A No of copies ay Border Printer default Print with border No border A Time stamp Printer default Print time stamp No time stamp No cropping 4 Start printing Pa Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press 68 EE Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 3 on page 151 _ 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 14 08 4288x2848 2 Choose an option a PictBridge Highlight one of the following options and Print select Select dat press gt Print DPOP ePrint select Select pictures for printing ae Select date Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a selected date ePrint DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu pg 160 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card se
244. re the exposure is complete use a fully charged battery or an optional AC adapter Note that noise may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu pg 165 If you are using an optional remote cord attach it to the camera 2 Rotate the mode dial to M 3 Choose a shutter speed Press the shutter release button halfway to activate the exposure meters and rotate the main command dial until nus amp appears in the shutter speed displays For a shutter speed of select delayed remote or quick response remote mode after choosing the shutter speed pg 64 85 86 4 Open the shutter tort on After focusing press the shutter release button on the camera or remote cord all the way down Keep the shutter release button pressed until the exposure is complete Press the shutter release button on the remote control all the way down The shutter will open immediately quick response remote or two seconds after the shutter release button is pressed delayed remote and remain open until the button is pressed a second time Close the shutter tis in Take your finger off the shutter release button Press the shutter release button on the remote control all the way down Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes Length of exposure 35 s Aperture f 25 Exposure Metering The metering method determines how the camera se
245. reating Retouched Copies in Full Frame Playback 1 Choosea picture Display the desired picture in full frame playback pg 128 N 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 2 Display the retouch menu Fx DHighting Red eye correction Press to display the retouch menu Q Filter effects of Color balance Cm Small picture Cancel 3 Select retouch options Monochrome Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu Lirie and press gt to display retouch options for Cyanotype more information see the section for the selected item on the following pages To return to full frame playback without creating a retouched copy press P OLEE 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon ANN 100NCD90 CSC_0013 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 14 08 4288x2848 Retouch The D90 may not be able to display or create retouched copies of images created with other devices The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay gt Menus The default is 20 s 210 EE Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu 1 Select an item in the retouch menu Press A or W to highlight an item P to select Depending on the option selected a menu may be displayed highlight an option and press gt 2 Selecta picture The pictures on the memory
246. residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet ona circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D90 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects
247. ring II 87 Autoexposure Lock P S and A Modes Only Use auto exposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 1 Select center weighted or spot lt 3 button metering Select mode P S or A and choose center weighted or spot metering exposure lock has no effect in mode M while auto and scene modes are not recommended as center weighted and spot metering are not available Main command dial 2 Lock exposure Shutter release ae ee button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press j the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock focus and exposure While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator will appear in the viewfinder 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure Mode Setting Programmed auto Shutter speed and aperture flexible program pg 80 Shutter priority auto Shutter speed Aperture priority auto Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released
248. rn the camera on Power switch FN O mmm AUTO a Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on The control panel and viewfinder displays will light 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the viewfinder or control panel Control olan Viewfinder Description Battery fully charged Battery partially discharged Low battery Ready fully charged spare battery or prepare to charge battery iA Battery exhausted shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery Note When camera is powered by optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter battery level is not displayed instead a icon appears in the shooting information display pg 10 J 0 fl a al 34 3 Check the number of exposures remaining The exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be stored on the memory card Check the number of exposures remaining If there is not enough memory to store additional photographs at current settings the display will flash as shown at right No further pictures can be taken until the memory card has been replaced pg 31 or photographs have been deleted pp 49 162 Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if th
249. rtup and at shutdown Image Sensor Cleaning The following interrupt image sensor cleaning raising the built in flash pressing the shutter release iy depth of field preview or AF button using the AE L AF L button to focus or using the Fn button for FV lock Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually pg 246 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait 245 246 EE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu pg 244 the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL3e battery or connect an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 2 Remove the lens Turn the camera off and remove the lens 3 Select Lock
250. s lt Thumbnail list Delete highlighted picture pg 140 a Change protect status of highlighted See page 139 for more information photo Return to shooting a Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken mode 7 N immediately Display menus MENU See page 159 for more information 137 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Ue Description Press amp to zoom in to maximum of approximately 27 x large images Zoom in or out Q 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Press 9 1 to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Faces up to 10 detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in navigation window Rotate sub command dial to scroll display to faces without changing zoom ratio View other areas of image Select faces IJS View other Rotate main command dial to view same location in other images images at current zoom ratio Change protect gep Yon See page 139 for more information S
251. s 36 Step 3 Check Camera SettingS sssssssssscsssssscsssecsssssscsssecsssssscsssecsssececseseessseseessseenesees 36 Step 4 Frame the Photograph cesssssssssessssssscsssessssssecsssssecsssecsssesscsssecsssesscseseessseesenees 37 APS FO U pepe eae nr OT A oa 38 SEI SOMO OU a E nected nr state autre anatase 39 Creative Photography Scene Modes csssssssesscsssessssssssecsssssecssssssssssssessssssssessesssesees 41 EPO E EER 41 TE 10 E 0 PEE E AA EE AEE A A E E A T 41 RE aE a A EN E ETA ET meant nt A N ante A 42 viii O e ee ee a a ee ee a ee ee eon ere eee 42 E NIGOE POCA eroi aa E E ee eee 42 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View ssessesssesssessesssesseoseessesseesseeseeseesseeseess 43 BSA OU scone cats a EAA A A A E E 48 Deleting Unwanted PhotographS seseesssessseesssessseessseesseesssessssessseeosseesseesssesssseesseesseesss 49 Recording and Viewing Movies Live View sssessesssessesseessesseesscsssessesseesseosesssesseessee 50 More on Photography All Modes 53 POCU e E E E E E A 54 AO OCG E E 54 FOCUS Point SEISCE OM svsszssssecesvssnpssasssvnssnevovseieodansdeenensnstvesnvanensanensdossvedewvandvsnvessvearesensannseavens 56 FOCUS E E E castoed ws ventinstieeavean ania 57 Manual FOCUS erenneren ON 59 Image Quality and SiZe sesesssesssesssessseesseesseesseesssesseesseeoseeoseeoseeoseesssesssesssesssesssesssrosersseesses 61 Image Quality snsisosenynsrann rra SR
252. s approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL3e battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations 249 Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Refer to the page numbers in the right most column for more information Display Problem Solution Page l i i Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece Viewfinder is out of focus J p yep correction lenses a Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery 34 j Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto 179 Display LUM ONMIN UTW AMNINg meter off delay or c4 Moni
253. s are not rotated automatically during image review pg 128 205 Image Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 available separately for more information see the Capture NX 2 manual Image dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Choose a start option Image Dust Off ref photo Highlight one of the following options and press To exit without acquiring image dust off data press MENU Start OK Clean sensor and then start e Start The message shown at right will be Image Dust Off ref photo displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays Moedlatechil teat e Clean sensor and then start Select this option to Lagi gla P clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is complete SSS ee image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters f
254. s automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode M adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 pg 84 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel CE Zw Ss WB button Main command dial Control panel 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel starts to flash A flashing Z will also appear in the control panel and viewfinder At default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds To exit without measuring a value for preset white balance press the WB button again Viewfinder 101 102 4 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 5 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel while the viewfinder will show a flashing id At default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Control panel I Viewfinder If l
255. s available in all shooting modes d9 LCD Illumination At the default setting of Off the control panel backlight LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is rotated toward 8 If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active pg 35 Select Off for increased battery life This option is available in all shooting modes d10 Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of Off shutter is released when the shutter release button is pressed In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised This option is available in all shooting modes d11 Flash Warning In P S A and M modes the flash must be raised manually before use If On the default setting is selected for this option and lighting is poor the flash ready light will flicker in the viewfinder when the shutter release button is pressed halfway to warn that the built in flash is required No warning will be displayed if Off is selected This option is available in P S A and M modes only 183 d12 MB D80 Battery Type To ensure that the camera functions as expected when AA batteries are used in the optional MB D80 battery pack match the option selected in this menu available in all shooting modes to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There i
256. s no need to adjust this option when using EN EL3e batteries Option Description OLR6 LR6 AA alkaline default Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries ANM HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries OFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries BZR6 ZR6 AA Ni Mn Select when using ZR6 Ni Mn AA batteries Using AA Batteries EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion batteries are recommended for best performance Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries pg 275 The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline and nickel manganese batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Description _ Batteries fully charged a ca Low battery Ready fresh batteries ql CA blinks blinks Battery exhausted shutter release disabled Change batteries Battery level for EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion batteries is displayed normally The MB D80 Battery Pack The MB D80 takes one or two EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery or six AA alkaline Ni MH lithium or nickel manganese batteries an EN EL3e is supplied with the camera In t
257. s of View other frame Navigation window is displayed areas of image when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel zoom Ea If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy Cancel zoom CN Create copy T will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye 212 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph The 1920 1280 3 2 SAspect selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table N CR E To Description Increase size of crop amp Press the amp button to increase the size of the crop Reduce size of crop Press the 9 button to reduce the size of the crop Change crop aspect Ee Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect ratio LRA ratios of 3 2 4 3 and5 4 Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG photos have an image quality of JPEG fine pg 62 copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Move crop Aspect ratio Possible sizes 3 2 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x
258. s selected once the flash is charged it will automatically pop up and fire if required when the shutter release button on the ML L3 is pressed In P S A and M modes raising the flash during the two second count down in delayed remote mode will cancel the two second timer Wait for the flash to charge and then press the shutter release button on the ML L3 to restart the timer In flash sync modes that support red eye reduction the red eye reduction lamp will light for about one second before the shutter is released In delayed remote mode the self timer lamp will light for two seconds followed by the red eye reduction lamp which lights for one second before the shutter is released to reduce red eye When using a non CPU lens select manual flash control mode using Custom Setting e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash See Also For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand by mode before remote control mode is cancelled see Custom Setting c5 Remote on duration pg 180 For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the remote control is used see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 180 69 Using the Built in Flash The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit subjects BE Using the Built in Flash ci and s Modes 1 a 2 Choose a shooting mode Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode Choose a flash mode Press the
259. seessserssessseessseee 74 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 00 166 Beep mNmdicalON aeaaea 180 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures sesessessessessesseesses 35 White balance sssessssesseesssessseessserssesssseossees 95 White balance fine tuning indicator 97 AE L AF L button assignment s ssseesse s 200 Fn button assignMent s sssessseesseesssessse 197 Picture Control indicator 108 Active D Lighting indicator ssseesesse 119 High ISO noise reduction indicator 168 Long exposure noise reduction INGIC ATOR nianna RER 167 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 The Shooting Information Display Continued Meteng eeann E A 87 EAS FV MOOG aa AAS 71 Flash control mode for Optional flash UNITS seseeseseeseeees 233 Electronic analog exposure display 84 Exposure COMPENSATION ccesscscssceeeceeees 90 Bracketing progress indicator AE flash bracketing csssssssssessssseseeseees 92 White balance bracketing ss0 191 ADL bracketing sssessseessserssessseesssersseesss 193 AC adapter indicator sesesseesseesseesseesserssers 34 Flash value FV lock indicator 198 Flash compensation indicatot 000 91 Exposure compensation indicator 90 Multiple exposure indicator esceee 121 Bracketing indicator AE flash bracketing
260. sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user see page 74 When On is chosen ISO sensitivity will ne nO automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user flash level is adjusted appropriately The maximum value for auto ISO ISO sensitivity settings sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity A ISO sensitivity 200 option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu choose lower Maximum sensitivity 3200 values to prevent noise the minimum value for auto ISO Minimum shutter speed 1 30 sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200 In exposure modes P and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity When On is selected the control panel and viewfinder show ISO AUTO These indictors blink when sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 168 Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or M and choose a larger aper
261. sh bracketing White balance bracketing ADL bracketing Exposure lock e DX AF Nikkor All functions supported e Type Gor D AF Nikkor All functions supported PC Micro Nikkor does not support some functions IX Nikkor lenses not supported e Other AF Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il Lenses for F3AF not supported e Al P Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering ll e Non CPU Autofocus not supported Can be used in exposure mode M but exposure meter does not function Electronic rangefinder can be used if lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter 1 4000 30 s in steps of 1 3 or 1 2 EV bulb X 200 s synchronizes with shutter at 200 s or slower S single frame GL continuous low speed GH continuous high speed self timer B delayed remote quick response OIH Up to 4 5 fps Ct 1 fps 4 fps Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration TTL exposure metering using 420 segment RGB sensor e Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses e Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 6 8 or 10 mm circle in center of frame e Spot Meters 3 5 mm circle about 2 5 of frame centered on selected focus point e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV e Spot metering 2 20 EV CPU Auto modes amp auto auto flash o
262. sing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus V Using Manual Focus with AF Lenses Be sure the camera focus mode selector is set to M when using manual focus with AF lenses Focusing manually with the focus mode selector set to AF could damage the lens AF S DX Nikkor 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G VR Lenses pg 273 Like other AF S lenses the AF S DX Nikkor 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G VR lens used in this manual for illustrative purposes can be used for manual focus simply by setting the lens focus mode switch to M 59 EE The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 11 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 55 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flang
263. ssorsesssosseseees 74 ISO display and adjustment 0 181 The LCD Illuminator Rotating the power switch toward 8 activates the exposure meters and the control panel backlight LCD illuminator allowing the display to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminators will remain lit for six seconds while the exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward 8 again TaAHASJA zae JACE The Control Panel Continued 28 27 25 24 23 ISO AUTO gi ee a Bal bal 22 21 23 ISO sensitivity indicator sss ssseesssessseesssee 74 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 166 24 Bracketing progress indicator AE flash bracketing sssssessssesssseesssseessseee 92 White balance bracketing sss ss 191 ADL bracketing sssesseesesessseessersseesssessss 193 25 Bracketing indicator sssessseesseessseessseesssee 92 26 White balance bracketing indicator 191 27 Exposure compensation indicator 90 28 Multiple exposure indicator 121 Power switch EEEREN E VE The Viewfinder CON GAU BS W 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Can be hidden with Custom Setting d4 pg 181 Framing grid displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d2 181 Reference circle for center weighted metering sessesesessssssessorsesseeseessesse
264. t 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 180 can be used to turn the beep speaker on or off 55 Focus Point Selection The camera offers a choice of eleven focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame At the default settings the camera chooses the focus point automatically or focuses on subject in the center focus point The focus point can also be selected manually to compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame 1 Choose single or dynamic area AF Autofocus JaiAFareamode o Aaa PANE a 22 Center focus point t1 a At default settings the focus point is selected O EEEE ON e AUTO ZX AF point illumination AUTO automatically in a Z laf I P S A and M modes To i OFF enable manual focus point selection in these modes ae ei ae Live view autofocus Biot select Single point Dynamic area or 3D tracking 11 E b1EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 points for Custom Setting a1 AF area mode pg 173 2 Set the focus selector lock to Focus selector lock Set the focus selector lock to the position This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 3 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point in the viewfinder or control panel while the exposure meters are active
265. t memory card option in the setup menu 31 Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before id framing pictures in the viewfinder 1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera Power switch on 4 IA OAV C 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder display and focus point are in sharp focus When operating the diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye Focus point Eyepiece Correction Lenses Corrective lenses available separately pg 239 can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter 32 Basic Photography and Playback This chapter outlines the basics of taking and viewing photographs in auto and scene modes It assumes that default camera settings are used for information on restoring default settings see page 258 Point and Shoot Photography 4 and ModeS ccscsccssscsssecsscessscersscseeeees 34 Step ie Tunnitne Gamera OA aA a E cen amen AA E A eee 34 Step 2 Choose SHOOTING ANd FOCUS MOES csssssssssssssssssscsesessessscsssesessesesesescaesessesees 36 Step 3 Check Cimera setings vaca a sec e teat A Crees eeses AR ees eres 36 Step 4s Fraime the Photodra PMs eaa a eE a O N 37 SEPS EOU Laverne eee e e N N A A A A E facie peer eee 38
266. taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card Off is formatted or anew memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new default folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs Creates a new folder and resets file numbering to 0001 with the next photograph taken On RESET Reset 7 File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert anew memory card d8 Shooting Info Display At the default setting of AUTO Auto the color of the lettering in the information display pg 10 will automatically change from black to white or white to black in response to ambient lighting conditions To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose B Dark on light black lettering or W Light on dark white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color B 25 S0 To Dipo Bag 7 aoe anI D ES a Aa Dark on light Light on dark This option i
267. tatus Return to Hi Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately shooting mode N Display menus MENU See page 159 for more information 138 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame Zoom thumbnail and calendar playback the button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the tf button or the Delete option in the playback menu and have DOS read only status when viewed on a Windows computer Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted pp 30 202 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list N 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 2 Press the Xo button The photograph will be marked with a lel icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted display the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press ZA 15 09 2008 10 02 27 the Y button f _ amp 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 4288x2848 Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the gt and t buttons together for about two seconds 139 Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or
268. ted Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction or unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons e Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engi
269. ted for Built in flash 190 e3 Modeling Flash If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built in flash or an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed pg 82 The default setting is Off This option is available in P S A and M modes only e4 Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect P S A and M modes only Choose AE amp flash AE the default setting to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing pg 92 AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only to perform only flash level bracketing WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing see below or ADL bracketing to take one picture with Active D Lighting on and another with Active D Lighting off pg 193 EE White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white balance bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e4 Auto 9 E ABB fish __ bracketing set Note that white balance bracketing is not Fash ot r OK available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or ai ADL bracketing NEF RAW JPEG 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Number of shots GAL Bracketing progress indicator
270. the focus point can be chosen by pressing the MB D80 AE L AF L button and rotating the sub command dial t a7 Live View Autofocus This option available in all shooting modes determines how the focus point for autofocus is selected in live view Choose from the following options Mode Description The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects facing camera Use for portraits default for and si modes Use for hand held shots of landscapes and other non portrait subjects Wide area The focus point can be selected manually Default for a laa x P S A and M modes Use for pin point focus on a selected spot in the frame A tripod is recommended Default setting for amp mode Io Face priority 2ml 5 ka Normal area 176 b Metering Exposure b1 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl This option available in all shooting modes determines whether adjustments to shutter speed aperture exposure compensation flash compensation and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1 3 EV or 1 2 EV Option Description Changes to shutter speed aperture exposure compensation and flash compensation are in increments equivalent to 3 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed aperture exposure compensation and flash 1 2 1 2 step compensation are in increments equivalent to 1 2 EV The bracketing increment can be selected fro
271. the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the 7 button Once deleted photographs can not be recovered 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the i button A confirmation dialog will be displayed 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG 15 09 2008 10 14 08 4288x2848 Full frame playback i Delete Yes Cancel f Thumbnail playback To delete the photograph press the tf button again To exit without deleting the photograph press the gt button See Also To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 162 Use calendar playback to delete all pictures taken on a selected date pg 136 140 Pictmotion The Pictmotion option in the playback menu pg 160 is used PLAYBACK MENU to create and view slide shows with custom transitions and prr e 3 Hide image background music The following options are available BF soley mode Image review Option Description Rotate tal ictmotion Start View the completed Pictmotion show E Slide show Select pictures Choose pictures for the Pictmotion show Background music Choose background music Effects Choose the transitions between pictures EE Choosing Pictures To select the pictures that will be included in the Pictmotion wx Pictmotion show choose Select pictures in the Pictmotion menu The carrer following options will be displayed ae Option Description
272. the subject s view of the red eye reduction lamp may interfere with red eye reduction The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses If the flash fires in it or HIH mode pg 65 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause See Also See page 198 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e1 Flash shutter speed pg 185 For information on using the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e2 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 185 For information on previewing the effects of the flash see Custom Setting e3 Modeling flash pg 191 See the Appendix for more about the built in flash including flash control pg 265 shutter sync speeds pg 265 and range pg 266 For information on optional flash units see pg 233 73 74 ISO Sensitivity ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures ISO sensitivity can be set between values roughly equiv
273. ting modes Option Description Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to turn the grid display in the viewfinder on or off pg 9 Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to select the AF AF area mode area mode pg 173 Center focus Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to choose 8 Framing grid rig point between normal and wide center focus points pg 174 EV lock Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only see below Press again to default cancel FV lock Flash off The built in flash and optional flash units turn off while the Fn button is pressed MANT Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed metering Center weighted Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed metering C Spot metering Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Access top item Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY MENU Select this in MY MENU option for quick access to a frequently used menu item If image quality is set to JPEG fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic RAW will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF RAW copy will be RW NEF RAW recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again or turn the camera off 197 EE FV Lock
274. tivity and Flash Range ssseesseesssessseessseesseesssesssseesseroseeosseeossersseesss 266 PECCO n manasa 267 DAE a E E E E es eon ae eae 276 xiii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product EE WARNINGS Keep the sun out of the frame Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire ZN Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally Z Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking
275. to playback mode mode Press shutter release button halfway to return to shooting mode Exit to shooting mode A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the show was paused it will resume from the next picture or Exit to return to the playback menu Transitions Depending on the size of the images transitions may not be displayed 142 Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu pg 164 is used to display a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder pg 162 Hidden images pg 162 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start in the slide show menu and press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress To Use Description A Skip back skip ahead Cx gt Press lt q to return to previous frame gt to skip to next frame Vv Mew res proto lt ox Change photo info displayed pg 129 y Pause slide show Pause show see below Exit to playback menu MENU See page 159 for more information Exit to playback mode End show and return to playback mode Press shutter release button halfway to return to shooting mode Exit to shooting mode A dialog shown at right is displayed when the sh
276. to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock pg 27 Date format Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Daylight Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be saving time advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Time zone The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter pg 239 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available Option Description Option Description Dk Dansk Danish Pt Portugu s Portuguese De Deutsch German Ru Pyccxum Russian En English English Sv Svenska Swedish Es Espanol Spanish sx chy 8x82 Traditional Chinese Fi Suomi Finnish 6 px Simplified Chinese Fr Frangais French A AAG Japanese It Italiano Italian et sts Korean NI Nederlands Dutch No Norsk Norwegian PI Polski Polish 204 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed in ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 240 The comment is also visible
277. tor off delay 180 Unusual characters displayed in See A Note on Electronically Controlled 250 control panel Cameras below Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted The response times and brightness of these displays varies with temperature These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external Static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery taking care to avoid burns and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again In the event of continued malfunction contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected B U 250 Shooting All Modes Problem Solution Page Camera takes time to turn me Delete files or folders e Memory card is full or not inserted 29 35 Shuecreleacedicablede C
278. trol 4 Position the new item Choose position Image quality Press A or VW to move the new item up or down ISO sensitivity settings 7 n Movie setti in My Menu Press to add the new item AAFIN Repeat steps 1 4 to select additional items Move GOK EE Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu highlight Remove items and press P 2 Select items Remove items Done Highlight items and press to select or O Image quality j 1 i O ISO sensitivity setti deselect Selected items are indicated by a E Movie settings check mark T C 3Assign FUNC button 225 226 3 Select Done Remove items D Mw er size Highlight Done and press O Image quality O ISO sensitivity settings O Movie settings Eo 3 Assign FUNC button 4 Delete the selected items A confirmation dialog will be displayed Press amp to delete the selected items Yes Cancel Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the f button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press again to remove the selected item from My Menu EE Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu highlight Rank items and press P 2 Select an item Rank items Image quality NORM j i i ISO sensitivity setti Highlight the item you wish to move and press EAE 3 Assign FUNC button L k E OR Select items 3 Position the item Rank items Image quality ISO sens
279. ts exposure The following options are available Method Description Recommended in most situations selected automatically in auto and scene zm 3D color modes Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according matrix Il to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural results Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area Paice defaults to 8 mm circle in center of frame can be selected using Custom r Setting b3 Center weighted area pg 178 Classic meter for portraits weighted S i recommended when using filters with an exposure factor filter factor over 1x pg 240 Camera meters circle 3 5mm 0 14in in diameter approximately 2 5 of frame Circle is centered on current focus point making it possible to meter LJ Spot off center subjects if Auto area is selected for AF area mode as described on page 173 camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker To choose a metering method press the lt 3 button e s button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed 3D Color Matrix II Metering In matrix metering exposure is set using a 420 segment RGB sensor Use a type G or D lens for results that include range information 3D color matrix metering ll pg 228 With other CPU lenses 3D range information is not included color matrix mete
280. ttery will be listed separately only the battery level is Battery ase displayed when AA batteries are used OK Done Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance A five level display showing battery age 0 4 indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 t8 that the battery has reached the end of its Battery charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at age temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher Pic meter GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit pg 124 Eye Fi Upload This option is displayed only when one of the following 2GB Eye Fi memory cards available separately from third party suppliers is inserted in the camera Eye Fi Home Eye Fi Share and Eye Fi Explore as of March 2009 Eye Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase Be sure that Eye Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version Choose Enable to upload JPEG images taken with the camera to a preselected destination Note that pi
281. ture Note that when the flash is used the camera uses the shutter speed selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash shutter speed pg 185 in place of the value selected for Minimum shutter speed Active D Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows pg 119 The default setting is Auto This option is available in P S A and M modes only Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera This option is available in all modes Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than Adobe Adobe RGB sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched sRGB sRGB default Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or
282. tures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or gt To view additional information on the current photograph press amp and V pg 129 15 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 NIKON D90 To end playback and return to shooting mode e e press the shutter release button halfway j F11 200 35mm WautTo 0 0 sRGB ESD 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 _10 15 29 T14288x2848 48 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described on the previous page gt button 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 09 2008 10 02 27 4288x2848 2 Delete the photograph Press the f button A confirmation dialog will be displayed T button EN Delete NAV 5 VET Te 100NCD90 DSC_0001 JPG 15 09 2008 10 14 08 m4 Press the T button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press P Delete To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 162 49 a 50 Recording and Viewing Movies Live View Movies up to 2 GB in size can be recorded in live view mode Before recording choose frame size and sound options in the Movie settings menu pg 170 1 Press the Ly button button The mirror will be
283. ues for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1 219 NEF RAW Processing Create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs 1 Select NEF RAW processing NEF RAW processing Highlight NEF RAW processing in the retouch j menu and press to display a picture selection ft a on Zoom DOK dialog listing only NEF RAW images created with this camera note that hidden images are not displayed and can not be selected 2 Selecta photograph NEF RAW processing Image quality NORM P Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph as to view the highlighted photograph full frame ae ao press and hold the amp button Press to select 3 f the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step a Wancel Zoom OKOK 3 Adjust NEF RAW processing settings NEF RAW processing Image quality NORM gt The following options are available af N a acl Zoom OKOK Option Description Image quality Choose from FINE NORM and BASIC pg 62 Image size Choose from L M and S pg 63 Choose a white balance setting and adjust fine tuning pg 97 White balance This option is not available with images creating using Image overlay Choose a value for exposure compensation between 3 and 3 in Exposure comp increments of 1 these increments differ from the steps normally used for exposure compensation Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control pg 109 220 4 Copy t
284. uhiancasnsieineeni a 191 ES AOTP sic coset cca escatsees sce daca A 195 c6 Bracken Order senen AA 195 F G01 e 0 omen rn arena a a a een 196 S SW eerren oes ret et ne er rien ve er rar rere re ener ener one e tae m eerie es 196 f2 OK Button SHOOTING MOEe sccssessssessssesssssssessssscsssncsecsssecsssscsecscsecassscsesssssenees 196 B PASSION FUNG BUTTON e E O octamer 197 TASASSIGM AE L APSE BUO Nenecesa cee ncee ead 200 5 CUSTOMIZE Command Dials ccessessssessssessssscsessssecssscsssscsesasscsssscsecassecseessseenees 201 TO NO MEMO Card la E A A AA 201 7 REVerselNdicatOrS ano T sosutaeesiases 201 T Phe Setup Menti Camera SetuP naaa 202 Format Memory Card nrasane E A E O R ORAR 202 ECD BiG AUIS SS ees Aa 202 Clean inage SENS OF senenn O 203 Lock Mirror Up for CLEANING assu N A 203 Video ModE zsssuai nna a N R E O TNN 203 ADM Ersen E E teecmeasreuieds 203 WONG TINE ainean aa E E 204 ANGUS aa a Ce 204 Image CONTIN SING aossen a a a eactentesnis 205 PLUTO lmage Rotations a A ee lean 205 Mage Dust OFF REPRO Onana E 206 Bader IOa A E EA 208 GP eee E E D A a NT ren S RRO TS 208 Eve Fr UDlOd dasen A E 208 FrmMWwWare Verslunar n NA E E 208 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies s ssssessessssssssecesssssesseessesssseeeess 209 Creating Retouched Copies iesi a A 210 PEORNUN G erae E A taave esse eens teas 212 Red Eye COM CCHON erem an A Mente 212 URE aa E AE A E E T E E AS taeeauanaasunite 213 MONOCNTOM Eoaea na
285. uide 159 gt The Playback Menu Managing IMages sssssssssecsssssessssecsssscsessssssssssseesesneaes 160 Selecting Multiple Pictures ccssesssssecsssssscsssecsssssscsssccsssessssescsssessssessesesessssecsesessssees 160 DEIO E e T A ee ener 162 Playpack POEM eann EEEE 162 OCIMA eein AEE toy cuaeeuarsisva tect ss eeares 162 DPY MOG O caie E ny oo an E E AE AAE oe 163 Mage REVIEW se 163 Roae T A E ee eee er ee 163 PSII OM eects setest sce ceeut ch ce petecpsesewenenteacuaetaneet ck ciev uns canaeousticaestacestcitsaievapseaueesesasencstetes 163 SMAS SNOW Re ee se eT Eo ae eRe 164 Pritt Set DP OR src ceet eat erscetecarn E tear ee lctoee 164 O The Shooting Menu Shooting OptiOnS ssseesssseesssseesssseesseeesssscersseeessseeessseesssseesss 165 SOU PICTUPE CONU ON aonn A E A N 165 Ma nage Picture Controlar in o A R ARAR GR 165 Mage Q dsi R N 165 NM AGS SZE neea me pede scheucvas bua rtnenstretalactsanaeallbte tec nteai trustees 165 WAIE B ca CO res aches sen cds vacant tal esacus cane ease ant tnacens ature sR eT OIG 165 ISO SENSITIVID SONGS a artes aide R theese N 166 Active DAL 1G PAGING as cs vavscscassaatscosaesaneasesanveas E teen aaa 166 COlOF Sa Ce siriar N Mani AA 167 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction ssseesssessseessseessseesseesssessseesssee 167 FIG HS ONE ersan eaa A A 168 PNCTIN GE Folder aeaa A A E E 169 MODIC EX OOS UNE zae a a AN 170 Movie settingen a ee eee ee O OA 170 Custom S
286. umber of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that Times depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times The options available for Times are determined by flash Output Options available for Times output 1 4 2 1 8 2 5 1 16 2 10 1 32 2 10 15 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 187 Hi Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right Press lt Flash cntrl for built in flash or gt to highlight the following options A or W to change Sita Mode Comp Built in flash Tile 0 Group A TIL E O Group B TIL E O Channel CH Move G Set ONOK Option Description Built in P flash Choose a flash mode for the built in flash Commander flash TTL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV M_ Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire but the AF assist illuminator lights The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A
287. until is displayed in the control panel Cy button Main command dial Control panel 3 Frame the photograph Frame the photograph Before taking a photograph with the flash in P S A or M modes pg 78 press the button to raise the flash and wait for the indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder pg 70 The timer will stop if the flash is raised after the timer has started V Cover the Viewfinder After framing the photograph remove the DK 5 eyepiece cap viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap as shown This prevents light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure 66 4 Start the timer Press the shutter release button halfway to focus and then press the button the rest of the way down to start the self timer The self timer lamp will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will become more rapid At default settings the shutter will be released ten seconds after the timer starts The timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released The self timer can be cancelled by selecting another release mode Turning the camera off cancels self timer mode and restores single frame or continuous mode Bulb In self timer mode a shutter speed of tut bis equivalent t
288. ure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Using a Flash When a flash is used exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash level See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 177 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the 4 button see Custom Setting b2 Easy exposure compensation pg 177 Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the camera changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Flash compensation can be set to values between 3 EV darker and 1 EV brighter in increments of 1 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker button Sub command Control panel dial At values other than 0 a E4 icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the button The current value for flash compensation will be displayed when the button is pressed 0 EV 0 3 EV 1 0 EV button pressed t Normal
289. utomatically selected if the flash mode is set to off or auto when an optional flash unit is attached Auto with red eye reduction becomes red eye reduction e X mode Auto slow sync becomes slow sync auto slow sync with red eye reduction becomes slow sync with red eye reduction and off becomes slow sync i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 3200 At values over 3200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination With other Speedlights the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF assist illumination and red eye reduction When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 17 135 mm the SB 900 provides active AF assist illumination for all focus points note however that autofocus is available only with the following focus points Gy CO N NM f U WU J 17 105 mm Oo 0 0n 106 135 mm At a G M M o c When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24 105 mm the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provides active AF assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points 2 ED 4 CO U U 24 34 mm 9 o 3G 35 105 mm cece wA oR rI i g a In programmed auto the m
290. video device NEF RAW photos not displayed in Capture NX Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect Press A or W to choose photo information displayed or change settings for Display mode Photo was taken at image quality of NEF JPEG Select All for Playback folder Note that Current is automatically selected after photograph is taken Select On for Rotate tall Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation Camera orientation was changed while shutter release button was pressed in continuous release mode Photo is displayed in image review e Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken Photo is protected remove protection Memory card is locked Select All for Playback folder Note that Current is automatically selected after photograph is taken Memory card is full delete photos Photo is in NEF RAW format Create JPEG copy using NEF RAW processing or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2 Choose correct video mode Confirm that HDMI cable available separately is connected Update to Capture NX 2 Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not b
291. white the default setting Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple pg 112 Ajuo awWosYyOUOW AjUO woiypouow uou s uawijsnipe jenuew V A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the VFN E position of the subject in the frame Use a type G or D lens for best a results The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid a lit GAdiust OKOK 111 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the 9 button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The 2 following filter effects are available Option Description Y Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in 0 landscape photographs Orange produces more contrast than yellow red more R Red cont

User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents